Advance SW8000 Service Manual

Advance SW8000 Service Manual
SW8000
Service Manual
Advance Model Numbers:
Nilfisk Model Numbers:
56107501
56107503
56107505
56107507
56107509
56107511
56107512
56107513
56107514
56107515
56107517
65” Gasoline
65” LPG
65” Diesel
65” Gasoline w/ cab
65” LPG w/ cab
65” Diesel w/ cab
165 cm LPG
165 cm Diesel
165 cm LPG w/ cab
165 cm Diesel w/ cab
165 cm Petrol
English
1/13 Form No. 56043163
Service Manual – SW8000

Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
General Machine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Service Manual Purpose and Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Other Reference Manuals and Information Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Nilfisk-Advance Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Engine Manufacturers’ Technical Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Parts And Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper Safety Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Or Pushing A Disabled Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastener Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Shut Down The Diesel / Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Shut Down The Propane Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Machine Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil – Gasoline / Petrol & Lpg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil - Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Maintenance (150 Hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper Dust Control Filter (Panel Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To remove the hopper dust control filter... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method “C” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
23
SW8000 PM Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Know Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operator’s Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Main Machine Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Main Machine Controller Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Hydrostatic Neutral Position and Dead-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Recall of Stored Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic Shaker Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
ii
Service Manual – SW8000

Main Controller Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Main Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Sample Shop Voltage Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Dust Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DustGuard™ Spray System (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dust Control Vacuum System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplified Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41
42
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Maintenance and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Dustguard Spray Nozzle Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Dust Control Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Dust Control Vacuum Motor will not Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dust Control Vacuum Motor will not Shut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shaker Motor will not Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misting Pump will not Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
46
47
48
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotary Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Switch Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
50
51
52
52
53
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPDT Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K11 Seat Relay Coil and K12 Timer Relay (seat switch option only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S22 Brake Switch (seat switch option only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotary Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Electrical Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Component to Connector ID Look-up Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Component to Relay ID Look-up Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Connector Pin-out Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams, p/n 56382530, Rev. D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram, Kubota Gasoline Engine, p/n 56107658, Rev. A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram, Kubota LP Engine, p/n 56107659, Rev. A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Harness Diagrams, p/n 56382531 Rev. D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine System, Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
66
67
70
71
72
75
75
iii
Service Manual – SW8000

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manufacturers’ Technical Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Starter Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Protection – Low Oil Pressure Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glow Plug Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
75
76
76
76
77
77
78
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Air Filter Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bleeding the Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
82
82
82
83
84
84
85
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . .
Engine Overheating Problems . . . .
Loss of Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .
APECS 3000 Controller Fault Codes .
Compression Test . . . . . . . . . . .
88
89
89
89
90
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kubota 1.6L Gasoline Fuel System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kubota 1.6L LPG Fuel System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Starter Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Protection – Low Oil Pressure Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Protection – High Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
93
95
95
95
95
95
95
96
97
97
97
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LPG And Gasoline Engine Common Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LPG ONLY Engine Electrical and Fuel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Gasoline (Petrol) ONLY Engine Electrical and Fuel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Air Filter Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
104
104
104
105
106
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Engine Overheating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Shop Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
iv
Service Manual – SW8000

Engine Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Hopper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
111
112
113
Hopper Down, Hopper Door Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raise Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Hopper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Close Hopper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
117
118
119
120
Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper Interlock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper Lift Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper Prop Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hopper Door Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly and Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
121
122
122
123
123
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
128
128
129
129
Hydraulic Piston and Gear Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Oil Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
130
131
131
132
Hopper System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Hopper System Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Hopper System Hydraulic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
To Check the Hydraulic Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
To Change the Hydraulic Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
To Clean the Hydraulic Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information Regarding Checking Hydraulic Pressures .
Checking the Gear Pump Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Piston Pump Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
134
134
135
136
136
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
v
Service Manual – SW8000

Hydraulic Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Hydraulic Schematic, 56507055, Rev. L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
SW8000 Deluxe Cab Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cab Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Clean and Replace the Cab Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
152
153
154
155
155
155
General System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Circuit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater Blower Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Troubleshoot the Heater Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Eliminate Air Locks from the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Vacuum Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purge the Heater Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
156
156
156
157
159
160
160
160
General System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Circuit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Condenser Fan, Thermostat, Pressure Switch and Compressor Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory (Gear) Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compressor Relay (K10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary Pressure Switch (S34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermostat (S33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
161
162
163
165
166
166
167
169
Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Heating and A/C System Plumbing and Hydraulic Flow Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hydraulic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Steering Control Unit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Stationary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Turned Toward the Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Turned Toward the Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Held in Full Right or Left Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Steering Wheel with the Engine Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
175
176
177
178
179
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Steering Wheel and Steering Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Steering Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
vi
Service Manual – SW8000

Sweep System, Main Broom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Hydraulic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Maintenance and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Cleaning and Inspecting the Main Broom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotate or Replace the Main Broom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspect and Adjust the Broom Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspect Housing Skirts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
186
187
187
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Main Broom Motor Will Not Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Sweep System, Side Broom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Circuit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Circuit, Brooms Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Circuit, Brooms On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
190
191
191
192
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Side Broom Won’t Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Side Broom Won’t Raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Side Broom Won’t Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Wheel System, Non-Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Maintenance and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
To Remove and Reinstall a Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
To Remove and Reinstall a Brake and Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Wheel System, Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piston (drive) Pump and Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foot Pedal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward/Reverse Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Wheel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
198
199
199
200
Drive Motor in Neutral . . . . . . . .
Tow Valve in Bypass Position . . . . .
Drive Motor in Forward or Reverse .
Drive Motor Stalling Out . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematic and Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Hydraulic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
201
201
202
203
Piston (drive) Pump and Tow Valve . . .
Drive Motor and Rear Wheel Assembly .
Foot Pedal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward/Reverse Controls . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
204
204
205
205
Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
vii
Service Manual – SW8000

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
To Set the Drive Pump Neutral Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
viii
Service Manual – SW8000
9
General Information
General Machine Description
The SW8000 machine is an industrial power rider broom sweeper. Gasoline (Petrol), LPG and diesel engine
models are available, with or without the DustGuard™ option. The machine is hydraulic powered and
electrically controlled. The sweep system has a center main broom and a right-hand side brooms. A left hand
side broom is available as an option.
Service Manual Purpose and Application
This Service Manual is a technical resource designed to aid service personnel in maintaining and repairing
the SW8000 Sweeper to ensure optimum performance and long service life. Please read it thoroughly before
servicing your machine.
Other Reference Manuals and Information Sources
Nilfisk-Advance Publications
Model Name
Model Number Instructions for
Use Form Number
Advance SW8000 4 Cylinder LPG
56107503
Advance SW8000 4 Cylinder Gasoline / Petrol
56107501
Advance SW8000 4 Cylinder Diesel
56107505
Advance SW8000 4 Cylinder LPG / Cab
56107509
Advance SW8000 4 Cylinder Gasoline / Petrol Cab
56107507
Advance SW8000 4 Cylinder Diesel / Cab
56107511
56091065: English,
Spanish, French,
Portuguese
Parts List Form
Number
56042600
56042602
56042601
56042603
These manuals can be found in the following locations:
• EzParts within Nilfisk-Advance Dealer Customer Zone website or EzParts CD-ROM
• Nilfisk-Advance website: www.Nilfisk-Advance-us.com
Engine Manufacturers’ Technical Manuals
Engine Type
Publication Title
Diesel:
Kubota 05 Series Service Data Book 9Y110-00051.pdf
Workshop Manual, Diesel Engine, 05 Series, WG1605 9Y111-00126.pdf
Woodward Product Specification 03399, APECS™ 0175 Series Actuators
Gas/LPG:
Operator’s Manual WG1605 EG523-89162ENG.pdf
Engine Specifications WG1605 9Y110-01770.pdf
Workshop Manual WG1605 9Y111-06610.pdf
Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf
Introduction
This manual will help you get the most from your Advance rider Scrubber-Sweeper. Read it thoroughly
before servicing the machine. Refer to the “Know Your Machine” section for component locations discussed in
this chapter.
This product is intended for commercial use only.
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Parts And Service
Repairs, when required, should be performed by your Authorized Advance Service Center, who employs
factory trained service personnel, and maintains an inventory of Advance original replacement parts and
accessories.
Call the ADVANCE DEALER named below for repair parts or service. Please specify the Model and Serial
Number when discussing your machine.
(Dealer, affix service sticker here.)
Name Plate
Unit Nameplate
Unit Nameplate Location
The Model Number and Serial Number of your machine are shown on the Nameplate on the machine. The
Model Name imprinted on the nameplate will be SW8000 and the Part Number will correspond to engine
type and options on the machine (example: “56107503”). This information is needed when ordering repair
parts for the machine. Use the space below to note the Model Number and Serial Number of your machine
for future reference.
MODEL NUMBER ________________________________________
SERIAL NUMBER ________________________________________
Caution and Warning Symbols
It is important for you to read and understand this manual. The information it contains relates to protecting
your safety and preventing problems. The symbols below are used to help you recognize this information.
Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Caution: When used without the Safety Alert Symbol, indicates a potential situation which, if not
avoided, could result in property or machine damage.
10
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
General Safety Instructions
Specific Cautions and Warnings are included to warn you of potential danger of machine damage or bodily
harm.
Warning!
−− This machine emits exhaust gases (carbon monoxide) that can cause serious injury or
death, always provide adequate ventilation when using machine.
−− This machine shall be used only by properly trained and authorized persons.
−− This machine is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical,
sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge.
−− While on ramps or inclines, avoid sudden stops. Avoid abrupt sharp turns. Use low speed
down ramps.
−− To avoid hydraulic oil injection or injury always wear appropriate clothing and eye protection
when working with or near hydraulic system.
−− Turn the key switch off (O) and disconnect the batteries before servicing electrical
components.
−− Never work under a machine without safety blocks or stands to support the machine.
−− Do not dispense fl ammable cleaning agents, operate the machine on or near these agents,
or operate in areas where fl ammable liquids exist.
−− Only use the brushes provided with the appliance or those specifi ed in the instruction
manual. The use of other brushes may impair safety.
−− Do not use the machine without a falling object protective structure (FOPS) in areas where
it is likely that the operator is hit by falling objects.
−− Machines shall be parked safely.
−− The machine shall be inspected by a qualifi ed person regularly, in particular regarding the
LPG container and their connections, as required for safe operation by regional or national
regulations.
−− Observe the Gross Vehicle Weight, GVW, of the machine when loading, driving, lifting or
supporting the machine.
Caution!
−− This machine is not approved for use on public paths or roads.
−− This machine is only approved for hard surface use.
−− This machine is not suitable for picking up hazardous dust.
−− When operating this machine, ensure that third parties, particularly children, are not
endangered.
−− Before performing any service function, carefully read all instructions pertaining to that
function.
−− Do not leave the machine unattended without first turning the key switch off, removing the
key and applying the parking brake.
11
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
−− Turn the key switch off and remove the key, before changing the brooms, and before
opening any access panels.
−− Take precautions to prevent hair, jewelry, or loose clothing from becoming caught in moving
parts.
−− Before use, all doors and hoods should be properly latched.
−− The battery must be removed from the machine before the machine is scrapped. The
disposal of the battery should be safely done in accordance with your local environmental
regulations.
−− Do not use on surfaces having a gradient exceeding that marked on the machine.
−− All doors and covers are to be positioned as indicated in the instruction manual before using
the machine.
Hopper Safety Support
Warning! Make sure the Hopper Safety Support is in place by using the Hopper Safety Support
Handle whenever attempting to do any maintenance work under or near the raised
hopper. The Hopper Safety Support mechanically holds the hopper in the raised position
to allow work to be performed under the hopper. NEVER rely on the machine’s hydraulic
components to safely support the hopper. See “To Engage The Safety Support” below.
Hopper Safety
Support
Hopper Safety
Support Handle
Hopper Safety Support
12
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
The Hopper Safety Support must be engaged whenever personnel are working on or underneath the hopper.
The safety support prevents the hopper from being lowered, or from dropping down accidentally if there’s a
failure in the hydraulic system. The Hopper Safety Support Handle operates the Hopper Safety Support.
To engage the Safety Support:
1. Raise the hopper to its full-up
position.
2. Pull the Hopper Safety Support
Handle toward the rear of the
machine to engage the Safety
Support as shown here.
3. Lower the hopper to rest on the
Safety Support.
To disengage the Safety Support.
1. Raise the hopper to its full-up
position.
2. Push the Hopper Safety Support
Handle toward the front of the
machine to the to the disengaged
position.
age
Eng ety
Saf ort
p
Sup
e
eas
Rel fety
Sa ort
p
Sup
Hopper Safety
Support Handle
Hopper Safety Support Operation
3. Lower the hopper.
Jacking The Machine
Caution! Never work under a machine without safety stands or blocks to support the machine.
−− When jacking the machine, do so at designated locations (Do Not jack on the hopper)
Jack Location
On Metal Frame
Jack Location
On Metal Frame
Jack Location
On Weight
13
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Transporting The Machine
Caution! Before transporting the machine on an open truck or trailer, make sure that . . .
−− All access doors are latched securely.
−− The machine parking brake is set.
−− The machine is tied down securely - see tie-down locations in following figures.
Tie Down
Tie Down
Tie Down - Left Front
Tie Down - Left Rear
Tie Down
Tie Down
Tie Down - Right Front
Tie Down - Right Rear
14
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Towing Or Pushing A Disabled Machine
Caution! The machine’s drive propelling pump is manufactured with an adjustable tow valve. This
valve prevents damage to the hydraulic system when the machine is being towed/pushed
short distances without use of the engine. To access the valve; unlatch and open the Oil
Reservoir / Fuel Tank Cover, then open the Engine Compartment Cover and locate the
hydrostatic pump at the rear of the engine. The illustration below shows the location. Turn
the valve 90 degrees; this disengages the hydrostatic lock between the motor and pump.
The hydraulic propelling pump can be damaged if the machine is towed with the valve in
the normal working position. Reference the illustration below for the normal working setting
(vertical) and the free wheeling towing setting (horizontal). Note: If the tow valve is left in
free wheeling (horizontal) position the propelling pump can’t drive the machine FWD or
REV. No damage will result, just re-set valve to the normal working setting (vertical).
NOTE: Tow or push machine no faster than a normal walking pace (2-3 miles per hour) and
for short distances only. If the machine is to be moved long distances the drive wheel needs
to be raised off the floor and placed on a suitable transport dolly.
Free Wheeling
Towing Setting
Hydraulic Propelling Pump Tow Valve
Normal Working
Setting
15
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Technical Specifications
General Specifications common to All Models
English (Metric)
Dimensions
Height w/Overhead
Guard
Height
Front View
Side View
Length
Width
Front View
Side View
Length
95 inches (2241 cm)
Width (minimum)*
64 (163cm)
Height
59 inches (150cm)
Height w/overhead guard
81.25 inches (206cm)
Height w/cab
79 inches (201cm)
Ground clearance
3.5 inches (8.9cm)
Minimum ceiling height dumping clearance
101.4 inches (257.5cm)
Weights
Gross weight, without cab**
4426 lbs. (2007kg)
Gross weight, with cab**
4775 lbs. (2165kg)
Sweep System
Main broom length
50 inches (127cm)
Main broom diameter
14 inches (35.5cm)
Main broom bristle length
3.25 inches (8.26cm)
Sweeping path w/single side broom
65 inches (165cm)
Sweeping path w/dual side brooms
77 inches (196cm)
Side broom diameter (STD)
26 inches (66cm)
Side broom bristle length
6 inches (15.2cm)
*Width (minimum): Width of machine body at the hopper, no side brooms.
**Gross Weight: Standard machine without options, with 175 lbs. operator, with standard sweeping brooms
and full tank of fuel.
16
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Technical Specifications
Hopper System
Capacity
14 ft3 (396L)
Lifting capacity
1000 lbs. (454kg)
Dump height (variable)
Max. 60 inches (152cm)
Dump height with door open
52.75 inches (134cm)
Dust Control System
Filter type: Pleated paper panel STD (optional poly filter
available)
Filter media area
94 ft2 (8.7m2)
Filter dimension
3.19” x 18” x 30” (8.1cm x 45.7cm x 76.2cm)
Dust Guard Water Misting Tank Capacity
14 gal. (53L)
Steering System
Type: Full power steering unit and hydraulic cylinder
Turn radius left
95” (242cm)
Turn radius right
63” (160cm)
Minimum aisle turn width (left)
109 in. (277cm)
Hydraulic System
Oil type: SAE 10W-30 (fill to bottom of screen)
System fill capacity
11 gal. (41.6L)
Engine System
Diesel & Petrol (gasoline) fuel tank capacity
12.5 gal. (47.3L)
Tires
Tire pressure (all 3)
90-100 PSI (6.2 - 6.9 bar)
Engine
Sound Level
At operators ear - LPG/Gasoline (Petrol)
At operators ear - Diesel
79.3 dBA
85.5 dBA
Speed and Gradeability
Maximum grade angle (transport)
20% / 11.3°
Maximum grade angle (sweeping)
20% / 11.3°
Maximum trailer loading angle (all models)
19.4°
Travel speed (Maximum forward)
9 mph (14.5km/h)
Maximum reverse speed
5.5 mph (8.8km/h)
*Width (minimum): Width of machine body at the hopper, no side brooms.
**Gross Weight: Standard machine without options, with 175 lbs. operator, with standard sweeping brooms
and full tank of fuel.
17
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Fastener Torque Specifications
Standard Torque
Specifications (unless
otherwise specified)
Size
Plated Steel
Stainless Steel
#10
42 in.-lb.
28 in.-lb.
1/4“
100 in.-lb.
67 in.-lb.
5/16”
17 ft.-lb.
11 ft.-lb.
3/8”
31 ft.-lb.
20 ft.-lb.
1/2”
75 ft.-lb.
50 ft.-lb.
3/4”
270 ft.-lb.
180 ft.-lb.
M5
61 in.-lb.
36 in.-lb.
M6
9 ft.-lb.
62 in.-lb.
M8
22 ft.-lb.
13 ft.-lb.
M10
44 ft.-lb.
25 ft.-lb.
M12
70 ft.-lb.
40 ft.-lb
18
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance intervals given are for average operating conditions. Machines used in severe operational environments may require service
more often.
Maintenance Item
Perform Daily
Perform the “After Use” maintenance steps
X
Check parking brake
X
*Clean main and side broom(s)
X
Check filter indicator and lights (hyd & air)
X
Check engine coolant level
X
Check hydraulic oil level
X
Maintenance Item
15 hrs.
*Rotate main broom
X
Clean the DustGuard™ Spray Nozzles & Strainer
X
30 hrs.
*Inspect/adjust brooms
X
* Check / Clean Hopper Dust Control Filter Using
Method “A”
X
*Inspect broom housing skirts
X
*Inspect hopper seals
X
Clean radiator and oil cooler
X
150 hrs.
Perform engine maintenance
X
*Inspect and grease steering spindle
X
* Check / Clean Hopper Dust Control Filter Using Method “B”
X
* Check / Clean Hopper Dust Control Filter Using Method “C”
300 hrs.
1000 hrs.
X
Change the hydraulic oil filter
X
Change reservoir hydraulic oil
X
Flush the radiator
X
Engine fuel filter(s)
X
*See the Mechanical Repair Service Manual for detailed maintenance information of systems listed. (Sweeping, Hopper, Steering, Dust
Control). NOTE: Cleaning the hopper dust control filter is not required on models using the maintenance free bag filter.
After Use
1. Shake the Hopper Dust Control Filter (Figure 6, #12) and empty the hopper.
2. Check the maintenance schedule and perform all required maintenance before storage.
3. Move the machine to an indoor storage area.
4. Shut down the engine according to the shut down procedures.
5. Make sure the Ignition Switch is OFF and the Parking Brake is engaged.
Note: It is safe to clean this machine with a pressure washer as long as you do not spray directly at
or into electrical components or at the radiator or hydraulic oil cooler. The machine should
always be allowed to dry completely before each use
19
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
To Shut Down The Diesel / Gasoline Engine
1. Turn all controls to the OFF position.
2. Raise the brooms.
3. Place the Engine Speed Switch in IDLE and let the engine idle for 25 - 30 seconds.
4. Turn the Ignition Key Switch OFF and remove the key.
5. Apply the Parking Brake.
To Shut Down The Propane Engine
1. Turn all controls to the OFF position.
2. Raise the brooms.
3. Turn the service valve on PROPANE Tank OFF.
4. Run the engine until all the PROPANE is dispelled from the line (the engine will stall).
5. Turn the Ignition Key Switch OFF and remove the key.
Note: The 4 cylinder LPG engine will continue to run for a few seconds after switching the key to
off. This is part of the proper operation of the closed loop electronic control system.
6. Apply the Parking Brake.
Important Machine Lubrication
Rear Steering Yoke Bearing Assembly : Once every 150 hours attach a grease
gun to the yoke bearing pivot zerk (location under operator’s seat) and pump a small
amount of grease into bearing assembly.
Also every 150 hours apply light machine oil to maintain free movement of all
general pivot points. Example the seat adjustment track, and broom door hinges etc.
Broom and hopper pivots use composite bearings; lubrication is not required.
Caution! For the protection of the environment; when servicing any of the machine’s lubrication fluids
they must be disposed of safely in accordance with your local environmental regulations
(recycling). Examples of machine lubrication products: (Engine crankcase oil, Engine
crankcase oil filter, Hydraulic system oil, Hydraulic system oil filters).
Engine Coolant
Caution! Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
To check the engine coolant level, first unlatch and open the Oil Reservoir / Fuel Tank Cover then tilt the
Engine Compartment Cover and observe the coolant level on the Coolant Recovery Tank. For Cab equipped
models, the cab panels and left side window must be opened in order to tilt the Engine Compartment Cover.
If the level is low add a mixture of half water and automotive type anti-freeze. Clean the radiator and oil
cooler exteriors by washing with LOW-RESSURE water every 30 hours.
20
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Caution! Do not use a pressure washer on the raditor or hydraulic oil cooler. Doing so may bend the
cooling fins reducing cooling capability.
Service Note: The oil cooler tips out for easy cleaning.
Engine Oil – Gasoline / Petrol & Lpg
Check the engine oil level when the machine is parked on a level surface and the engine is cool. Change
the engine oil after the first 35 hours of operation and every 150 hours after that. Engine oil should have
properties of API classification SL or higher.and suited to seasonal temperatures. Refer to the Kubota
Workshop Manual, Engine Specifications and Operator’s Manual for the WG1605 for further information
Replace the oil filter with every oil change.
Temperature Range
Oil Weight
Above 25 C (77 F)
SAE30 or SAE10W-30
SAE15W-40
0 C to 25 C (32 F to 77 F)
SAE20 or SAE10W-30
0 C to -20 C (32 F to -4 F)
SAE10W or SAE10W-30
Engine Oil - Diesel
Check the engine oil level when the machine is parked on a level surface and the engine is cool. Change
the engine oil after the first 35 hours of operation and every 150 hours after that. Use CF, CF-4 or CG-4 oil
meeting API specifications and suited temperatures (*important reference the oil/fuel type note below for
further diesel oil recommendations). Refer to the Engine System section for oil capacities and additional
engine specifications. Replace the oil filter with every oil change.
Temperature Range
Oil Weight
Above 77 °F (25 °C)
SAE 30 or SAE 10W-30, SAE 10W-40
32 °F to 77 °F (0 °C to 25 °C)
SAE 20 or SAE 10W-30, SAE 10W-40
Below 32 °F (0 °C)
SAE 10W or SAE 10W-30, SAE 10W40
* Diesel Lubricating Oil Note: Refer to the Kubota Diesel Engine 05-E3B Series Work Shop Manual for the
suitable American Petroleum Institute (API) classification of engine oil according to the engine type (with
internal EGR, external EGR or non-EGR) and the Fuel Type Used.
21
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Engine Air Filter
The engine Air Filter is located in the engine compartment. Check the air mechanical vacuum filter Service
Indicator before each use of the machine. Do not service the air filter unless the indicator is shown (red).
Caution! When servicing the engine air filter elements, use extreme care to prevent loose dust from
entering the engine. Dust can severely damage the engine.
The engine air filter contains a Primary (outer) and a Safety (inner)
filter element. The Primary Element may be cleaned twice before
being replaced. The Safety Element should be replaced every third
time that the Primary Filter Element is replaced. Never attempt to
clean the Inner Safety Element.
To clean the Primary Filter Element, unsnap the 2 clips at the
end of the air filter housing and remove the end housing. Pull
the primary element out. Clean the element with compressed air
(maximum pressure 100 psi) or wash it with water (maximum
pressure 40 psi). DO NOT put the element back into the canister
until it is completely dry.
Air Mechanical Vacuum Filter Service
Indicator Location
Empty dust from the outer plastic housing by squeezing the rubber
flap. Orientate flap down when reinstalling.
Engine Maintenance (150 Hours)
At 150 hour intervals it is recommended that the following service be performed: Change oil and filter, clean
and inspect spark plugs, check all engine belts condition and adjustment, check battery charge and level,
check cooling system hoses and clamps and check general condition and performance of engine.
Note: See the “Other Manuals Available” section for a complete list of the engine manuals that
are available.
Hydraulic Oil
Caution! To avoid hydraulic oil injection or injury, always wear appropriate clothing and eye protection
when working with or near hydraulic system.
Check the Hydraulic Oil Level. Unlatch and swing open the Oil Reservoir / Fuel tank Cover. Remove the
reservoir cap to check the oil level. The hydraulic oil level should be just above the bottom of the screen filter
inside the filler neck of the reservoir. Add SAE 10W30 motor oil if it is below this level. Change the oil if
major contamination from a mechanical failure occurs.
Change the Hydraulic “Charge” Oil Filter once a year or every 1000 hours.
22
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Hopper Dust Control Filter (Panel Filter)
The hopper dust control filter must be cleaned regularly to maintain the efficiency of the vacuum system.
Follow the recommended filter service intervals for the longest filter life.
Caution!
−− Wear safety glasses when cleaning the filter.
−− Do not puncture the paper filter.
−− Clean the filter in a well-ventilated area.
−− Wear appropriate dust mask to avoid breathing in dust.
To remove the hopper dust control filter...
1. Unlatch and open the Hopper Cover. Make sure that the Hopper Cover Prop Rod is in place.
2. Inspect the top of the Hopper Dust Control Filter for damage. A large amount of dust on top of the filter
is usually caused by a hole in the filter or a damaged filter gasket.
Inspect the bottom of the Hopper Dust Control Filter. If the filter is covered with wet or dry mud, the
dust control system will not function properly without replacing or thoroughly cleaning the filter using
Method “C”.
3. Loosen the four Shaker Assembly Retainer Knobs. Lift off the Dust Filter Shaker Assembly to access the
panel filter.
Note: Be careful not to damage the shaker motor wiring.
4. Lift the Hopper Dust Control Filter out of the machine.
5. Clean the filter using one of the methods below:
Method “A”
Vacuum loose dust from the filter. Then gently tap the filter against a flat surface (with the dirty side
down) to remove loose dust and dirt.
Note: Take care not to damage the metal lip which extends past the gasket.
Method “B”
Vacuum loose dust from the filter. Then blow compressed air (maximum pressure 100 psi) into the clean
side of the filter (in the opposite direction of the airflow).
Method “C”
Vacuum loose dust from the filter. Then soak the filter in warm water for 15 minutes, then rinse it under
a gentle stream of water (maximum pressure 40 psi). Let the filter dry completely before putting it back
into the machine.
6. Follow the instructions in reverse order to install the filter. If the gasket on the filter is torn or missing,
it must be replaced. NOTE: Before replacing filter clear debris from dust plate located under filter.
Verify that the debris flap at the rear of the dust plate swings freely.
23
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
SW8000 PM Checklist
Defect Codes
A Needs Adjustment
B Binding
C Dirty or Contaminated
D Damaged, Bent or Torn
L Leaks
MMissing
W Worn Out
Customer _________________________________________________
Address __________________________________________________
City ________________________________ St __________ Zip ______
Model __________________ Serial_________________ Hours ______
Ref
OPERATIONAL INSPECTION ITEMS
OK
Defect Codes
(circle)
1
Check Neutral Safety/Sense Switch operation (To test depress drive
pedal and start the engine; it should not start.)
2
Engine Starting with pedal in neutral (if it will not start, check sensor
switch programming)
3
Engine Speeds 4 cyl G/P (1200 - 2400 RPM)
4
Engine Speeds Diesel (note electrical actuator linkage 1200 - 2400 RPM)
5
Drive Pedal Linkage (check for FWD/REV drive and any neutral creep)
6
Drive System Performance
7
Brakes (check both service & parking)
A
Excsssive Play
A
B
C
Starts Hard
A
Low Power
A
B
Noisy
Sluggish
B
W
8
Steering
9
Hopper Up/Down (also check operation of the safety hopper support)
A
B
10
Hopper Dump Door Open/Close
A
B
11
Main Broom Raise /Lower
<----------->
12
Side Broom Raise /Lower
<----------->
13
Main Broom On/Off
<----------->
14
Side Broom On/Off
<----------->
15
Headlights, Gauges and Optional Accessories (example rotating beacon,
backup alarm)
16
Dust Control Filter Shaker & Vacuum Impeller
17
Tilt Steering Mechanism (OPT) and Seat Adjustment lever
18
DustGuard (OPT) Water Pump Operation On/Off
Ref
Does Not
Work
<----------->
VISUAL INSPECTION ITEMS
Comments
3 O’clock to 11
A
OK
B
Defect Codes
(circle)
19
Side Broom Pattern & Height Adj. (min bristle length 3
inches)
20
Side Broom Motor
B
L
21
Hopper Cover Gasket
D
W
D
A
22
Hopper Dust Filter & Gasket
23
Dust Control Vacuum Impeller Motor
24
Hopper Dump Door Cylinder
25
Hopper Skirting & Seals (raise hopper to inspect)
26
Hopper Dump Door & Seal (raise hopper to inspect)
A
27
Hopper Lift Cylinder & Hopper Interlock Switch
D
28
Main Broom Pattern Adjustment (min bristle wear
2-1/2” 6.4cm length)
A
B
D
W
W
L
Sheet 1 of 2
B
D
M
B
W
W
D
W
Does Not
Work
24
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
29
Main Broom Motor (open left side access door to
inspect)
30
Broom Housing & Door Skirts
B
D
L
M
W
31
Front tires (check lug nut torque 80FT LB, 108 Nm)
L
W
32
Battery
C
W
33
Engine Air Cleaner Element (inner & outer)
C
W
34
Circuit Breaker/Relay panel (inspect electrical
connections)
C
D
35
Hydrostatic Dump Valve
36
Hopper Up Transport Speed control Cam/Cable
Linkage
37
Propulsion drive & Accessory Pumps
L
38
Hydraulic Reservoir, System Hoses & fittings
L
39
Propulsion Pump Hydro Back Cable & Clevis
Connections
40
Engine, Oil Level, Hoses & Belts
41
Engine Coolant Level
42
Radiator & Oil Cooler Core Blockage
43
Hydraulic Oil Reservoir Level (10W-30 engine oil only)
L Add Oil
44
Hydraulic Oil Filter
L Replace
45
Steer Spindle & Drive Wheel motor (open operator’s
seat)
46
Rear Tire (check lug nut torque 100 FT LB, 135Nm)
B
A
B
B
M
W
Add or Change L W
L Add Coolant
L Needs Cleaning
47
Gasoline/Diesel tank , Filter & Lines
48
LP Tank, Hoses & Fittings
49
LP Fuel Filter
50
LP Fuel Regulator, Lock Off Valve & Hoses
51
Diesel Glow Plug Indicator Light
52
Diesel Fuel Filter
D
L
L
M
C
W
L
L
L Replace
L
Replace
L Replace
53
Engine Air-Intake Hose Assembly (air inlet to engine)
54
DustGuard Water Tank, Misting Pump & Storage Tank
C
L
NOTE: For additional service information see service manual form number 56043163 and operators manual
form number 56091065 (English & Spanish).
Defect Codes A Needs Adjustment
B Binding
C Dirty or Contaminated
M Missing
D Damages, bent or torn
W Worn Out
L Leaks
Work Completed By: Acknowledged By:
__________________________________ ____________ __________________________________ ______________
Service Technical SignatureDateCustomer SignatureDate
Sheet 2 of 2
25
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Know Your Machine
Refer to these pages whenever necessary to pinpoint the location of an item mentioned in this manual.
Shaker
Assembly
Retainer
Knobs
Side Broom
Height
Adjustment
Knob
Hopper Dust
Control Filter
(Dust Filter Shaker Assembly
below filter)
Engine
Compartment
Cover
Center Cover
Assembly
Tie-Down
Locations (5)
Hopper
Cover
Hopper Cover
Latch
Know Your Machine
Left Side Main
Broom Access
Panel
Jacking
Locations
(Rear location is large
weight below radiator)
26
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Engine
Compartment
Cover
Hopper Cover
Prop Rod
Tie-Down
Locations (5)
Right Side
Main Broom
Access Panel
Fuel Tank
Cover Release
Latch
Oil Reservoir
/ Fuel Tank
Cover
Oil Reservoir
Fuel Tank
Know Your Machine
(LPG tank shown / Gasoline /
Petrol tank is in same location)
27
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Operator’s Compartment
Main Broom
Adjust Knob
Steering Wheel
Main Broom Lever
Operator’s
Seat
(Operator Seat Adjustment
Lever under seat)
Know Your Machine
Control Panel
Hopper Safety
Support Handle
Brake Pedal /
Parking Brake
Circuit Breaker Panel
FWD / REV
Drive Pedal
28
Service Manual – SW8000
General Information
Control Panel
Horn Switch
Fuel Gauge (Not LPG)
Propane Low Indicator
Check Engine Indicator
Glowplug Indicator
(Diesel Only)
Headlight Switch
Engine Speed Switch
Side Broom Switch
Dust Control Vacuum
Switch
Shaker Switch
Raise Hopper Switch
Open Dump
Door Switch
Hopper Up Indicator
Hopper OverTemp Indicator
Close Dump
Door Switch
Key Switch
Check Engine
Indicator
Hour Meter
Lower Hopper
Switch
Optional DustGuard and Signalling Switches
Know Your Machine
29
Service Manual – SW8000
30
Control System
Functional Description
The SW8000 utilizes a main machine controller to turn on various machine functions. It receives sensor
inputs and operator inputs, and activates various solenoids and components. The main machine controller
is separate from the engine controller. The only engine function controlled by the main machine controller is
the engine speed.
Control Panel
The control panel (display) is an integral component with the Main Machine Controller (A2) circuit board.
Horn Switch
Fuel Gauge
Propane Low Indicator
Check Engine Indicator
Glowplug Indicator
(Diesel Only)
Headlight Switch
Engine Speed Switch
Side Broom Switch
Dust Control Switch
Shaker Switch
Raise Hopper Switch
Open Dump
Door Switch
Hopper Up Indicator
Hopper OverTemp Indicator
Close Dump
Door Switch
Key Switch
Hour Meter
Check Engine
Indicator
Lower Hopper
Switch
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Ignition (key) Switch (A): The ignition switch serves as a main control switch for the
machine and for starting the engine. The key is removable to prevent unwanted operation
when not in use. For diesel engines, it also controls the function of the glow plugs.
A
Hour Meter (B): The hour meter shows the run-time on the engine, and it use for
tracking maintenance tasks.
B
Fuel Gauge (C): For gasoline or diesel engines only. Shows the level of the fuel in the
fuel tank.
C
Horn Switch (D): Activates the horn
D
Propane Low Indicator (E): The lamp illuminates when the propane tank is empty.
E
Headlight Switch (F): Turns the headlamps on and off.
F
Check Engine Light (G): The lamp illuminates when the engine controller signals a
problem exists with the engine.
G
Glow Plug Indicator (H): (diesel engine only) The lamp is illuminated while the glow
plugs are active. Diesel engine glow plugs preheat the cold cylinders before starting
then engine. The glow plugs are activated when the ignition switch is turned to the
counterclockwise position
H
Engine Speed Switch (I): Switches between idle and run speed (rpm) of the engine. (Do
not drive or otherwise operate the machine while the engine is at idle.)
I
Side Broom Down/Up Switch (J): Raises and lowers the side brooms.
J
Dust Control Switch (K): Turns the dust control fan on and off.
K
Dust Control Indicator: Illuminates when the dust control fan is active.
Shaker Switch (L): Turns the shaker on and off. The dust control fan automatically
turns off while the shaker is active. The shaker is used to clean debris from the filter.
Plugged Filter Indicator: Optional equipment. The LED on the shaker switch
illuminates when the pressure sensor indicates the filter is clogged.
L
31
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Hopper Up Indicator (M): Illuminates when the hopper mechanism is not in the
lowered position.
M
Hopper Over-temp Indicator (N): This lamp illuminates if the hopper temperature
exceeds 140˚F (60˚C), due to ingestion of combustible materials or embers.
N
Open Dump Door Switch (O): Opens the dump door for emptying the hopper.
O
Close Dump Door Switch (P): Closes the dump door after emptying the hopper.
P
Lower Hopper Switch (Q): Lowers the hopper from the raised position after emptying
the hopper.
Q
Raise Hopper Switch (R): Raises the hopper for emptying.
R
Main Controller Fault Code Light (S): Flashes out the fault code for the controller.
Refer to Main Controller Error Codes described on page 36 for a listing of the specific
error codes.
S
32
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Main Machine Controller
The Main Machine Controller (A2) is the primary
electronic control for the machine and its functions
(except engine control). The control board is the basic
input/output device and contains a micro-controller
chip to regulate function. The controller receives
and interprets user inputs and sensor inputs, and
controls device output for the user display, solenoid
operation, and motor control. Most low and medium
power outputs are controlled with power MOSFET
transistors, and very high power devices are
controlled with external relays.
Another function of the Main Machine controller is
to detect any system failures and flash out an error
code with the fault code light (U) on the display
panel. The error code(s) are used to help the service
person determine the fault and to quickly guide
1
in repairing a specific system malfunction. An
additional special feature of the main control
A2
board is to change program settings for a set of
specific machine functions. See the section,Main
Machine Controller Programming described on
page 35 for further information.
J1
B
J2
J3
J4
A
33
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Component Locations
The diagram below shows component locations for some components related to the Main Machine Controller.
• Main Machine Controller
• DustGuard and Signaling Switches
• Hydrostatic Drive Position Sensor
• Engine Controller
Main Machine
Controller
Optional DustGuard
and Signalling
Switches
Hydrostatic Drive
Position Sensor
Engine
Controller
34
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Main Machine Controller Programming
Hydrostatic Neutral Position and Dead-band
The purpose of this adjustment procedure is to synchronize the electrical neutral position with the
mechanical neutral position of the hydrostatic drive. The mechanical neutral position needs to be adjusted
first, and this is where the self-centering drive cable matches the neutral position of the hydrostatic drive.
A rotary sensor (potentiometer) reports the position of the drive pump lever to the main machine controller.
This procedure records the voltage value of the potentiometer that signifies when the drive is in the neutral
position.
The dead-band adjustment is the sensitivity of the neutral position. If the dead-band is set too narrow (too
sensitive), the controller may believe the drive is in motion, when it is still in neutral, which would prevent
engine starting. If set too wide, the drive may be engaged when the controller believes it is in neutral, which
would prevent the sweeping system to engage.
Correctly setting these adjustments is important, because they control when the machine can be started, and
also when sweeping functions activate and deactivate.
These adjustments should be made anytime the Main Machine controller or potentiometer are replaced, the
mechanical adjustment is performed, or any time the machine shows symptoms of misadjustment.
1. Make sure the keyswitch is in the off position.
2. To ensure the drive is in the mechanical neutral position, press the drive pedal into reverse and slowly
release it. Avoid biasing the neutral position, and do not move the pedal for the remainder of the
procedure.
3. While holding the Engine Speed switch (I), turn the keyswitch (A) to the on position.
Continue to hold the speed switch until all display indicators turn off (approximately 2
seconds).
4. When the Engine Speed switch is released, the controller will record the resistance value
from the drive position sensor.
5. The Fault Code Light (S) will indicate the dead-band setting as described below. To
change the dead-band (sensitivity), press the Engine Speed switch (I) to cycle through the
3 options.
I
S
• Narrow = Steady on
• Medium = Slow flash (Default)
• Wide = Rapid flash
6. To save the settings and exit the process, turn off the keyswitch.
Recall of Stored Fault Codes
Past fault codes are stored in memory and may be retrieved and cleared as part of maintenance history.
1. Make sure the keyswitch is in the off position.
2. While holding the Horn switch (D), turn the keyswitch (A) to the on position. Continue to
hold the Horn switch until all display indicators turn off (approximately 2 seconds).
3. When the Horn switch is released, the Fault Code Light (S) will flash out the error codes.
If no past error codes exist the light will remain steady-on.
4. To clear the fault code history, press and release the Horn switch. The Fault Code Light
will change to steady-on.
5. To exit, turn the keyswitch off.
D
S
35
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Automatic Shaker Operation
This adjustment enables or disables the automatic shaker option, and how the shaker functions when it is
active in either automatic or manual operation. In either of the 2 automatic modes, the shaker will activate
for 15 seconds whenever the broom is raised. Automatic operation in Liberator mode is the default setting.
The 3 options are described below:
a. Liberator Mode: Automatic operation with manual operation by pressing the shaker switch. When
active, the shaker will be on for ½ second and off for ½ second for the 15-second duration of the
cycle.
b. Continuous Mode: Automatic operation with manual operation by pressing the shaker switch.
When active, the shaker will run continuously for the 15-second duration of the cycle.
c. Manual Mode: Manual mode only. When the shaker switch is pressed, the shaker will operate
continuously for the 15-second duration of the cycle.
1. Make sure the keyswitch is in the off position.
2. While holding the Shaker switch (L), turn the keyswitch (A) to the on position. Continue to L
hold the Shaker switch until all display indicators turn off (approximately 2 seconds).
3. The Shaker light (L) and Fan Light (K) will indicate the current state of the automatic
shaker function, as described below.
K
4. Press the Shaker switch to toggle through the setting.
• Liberator Mode: Both Shaker and Fan lights on.
• Continuous Mode: Shaker light on.
• Manual Mode: Neither light on.
5. To exit, turn the keyswitch off.
Troubleshooting
Main Controller Error Codes
The following table lists the main controller error codes. When an error code is present, the
Error Code lamp (S) will flash out the specific 2-digit code(s). Count the flashes for each digit.
There will be a short pause between digits, and a long pause between error codes (or before
repeating the sequence of code(s)).
3/4-sec
pause
1/4-sec
Digit = 2
Code Pin #
1,1
1,2
J1-1
J1-2
Example:
Code = 2,3
S
2-sec
pause
Digit = 3
Description
Comments
Hopper close/open solenoid (L1)
overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 6 Ohms replace (8
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Blu/Wht)‡
Main broom solenoid (L2) overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 6 Ohms replace (8
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Grn/Gra)‡
36
Service Manual – SW8000
Code Pin #
1,3
1,4
2,1
2,2
2,3
2,4
Control System
Description
Comments
Side broom solenoid (L3) overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 6 Ohms replace (8
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Brn/Blk)‡
Dust control solenoid (L4) overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 6 Ohms replace (8
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Brn/Yel)‡
J1-5
Hopper up/down solenoid (L5) overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 6 Ohms replace (8
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Red/Gra)‡
J1-6
Hopper up/bypass solenoid (L6)
overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 6 Ohms replace (8
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Blu/Gra)‡
J1-7
Hopper door/open solenoid (L7)
overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 6 Ohms replace (8
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Blk/Wht)‡
J1-8
Dust control bypass solenoid (L8)
overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 4 Ohms replace (6
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Brn)‡
Hopper lower solenoid (L9) overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 6 Ohms replace (8
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Yel/Grn)‡
J1-3
J1-4
3,1
J1-9
3,2
J1-14 Shaker relay (K3) overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 70 Ohms replace (85
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Yel/Red)‡
3,3
J1-15 Back-up alarm overload
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Grn/Brn)‡
• If overload persists, replace the alarm.
J1-16 Light relay (K2) overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 70 Ohms replace (85
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Yel/Wht)‡
4,1
J1-18 Neutral start relay (K4) overload
• Check coil resistance.† If below 70 Ohms replace (85
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Gry/Wht)‡
4,2
Horn relay K1 overload
J1-19
Coil spec is 85 Ohms
• Check coil resistance.† If below 70 Ohms replace (85
ohms nominal).
• Check wiring for a short circuit (Vio/Brn)‡
4,3
Engine speed output overload
J1-17 Note the Gra/Blu wire is 0 V’s when
engine is @ idle.
• Throttle input to engine ECM (A3) is 0V for idle and
+12V for high speed.
• Check Gra/Blu wire for a short to ground.
4,4
J1-12
3,4
Spare overload
Not used at this time
NA
† When testing for short circuits, make sure the machine is off, and disconnect the connectors at the
solenoid or relay in question and also at the main controller. Then use an ohmmeter between the two
wires at the device, or between J1-11 and the listed J# from the table. The ohmmeter should show “open
circuit”.
‡ When testing a coil resistance, disconnect the connector at the device and use an ohmmeter to measure
the resistance of the coil. If the value is below the minimum value from the table, replace the device.
37
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Removal and Installation
Main Control Board
The main control board and the operator interface may be replaced separately or as an assembly. The same
procedure describes either option.
Caution! Unswitched battery power is present on the operator interface assembly. Make sure to
disconnect the battery connector to avoid damaging the system or wiring.
1. Turn off the key switch and disconnect the
battery cable connector.
2
1
2. Remove the 3 screws (2) that secure the
operator interface to the dash.
3. Lift the operator interface away from the
dash, taking care not to stress the wiring
harness.
4. Disconnect J1, J2, J3, and J4 from the control
board (A2).
2
5. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the
control board and remove the ground wire (4) .
6. Remove the control board.
2
7. After replacing the control board with a new
one, set the Hydrostatic Neutral Position and
Dead-band described on page 35.
8. If necessary, also set the Automatic Shaker
Operation described on page 36.
3
J2
A2
J1
J3 J4
3
4
38
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Specifications
Probe Wire
Sample Shop Voltage Measurements
Examining signals sent and received at the control board can be very effective
in determining if external components are functioning as expected or if the
control board is processing them as expected. The tables below show sample
voltage measurements taken from a typical machine. Actual voltages will vary
from machine to machine, and with battery charge level.
T-Pin
To aid in taking voltage measurements from the cable connectors without
removing the connector, a T-shaped push pin connected to the voltmeter probe
wire works well (see image to the right).
Main Machine Controller Sample Voltage Measurements at the J1 Connector
Pin #
Name
J1-1
Hopper close
valve
0.25
13.7
B-
J1-2
Main broom
valve
0.3
13.7
B-
0.3
13.7
B-
J1-3 Side broom valve
V-On V-Off Ref. Comments
J1-4
Dust control
valve
0.266
J1-5
Hopper up/down
valve
0.27
J1-6
Hopper up/
bypass vlv
J1-7
B-
Using litter control vac
13.7
B-
On = raising, Off = rest or down
0.3
13.7
B-
Hopper open
valve
0.25
13.7
B-
On = closed, Off = open
J1-8
Dust ctrl bypass
vlv
0.3
13.7
B-
On = bypass
J1-9
Hopper lower
valve
0.25
13.7
B-
On = down, Off = up or rest
J1-10
Bat-
0.011
B-
Key On
13.9
B-
Engine run
J1-11 Switched Bat+
J1-12
NC
B-
J1-13
NC
B-
J1-14
Shaker relay
0.07
13.9
J1-15 Back up alarm
B-
0.01
B-
J1-16
Light relay
0.04
13.9
B-
J1-17
Throttle out
13.0
2.6
B-
On = high, Off = idle
J1-18 Neutral pos. relay
0.05
13.9
B-
On = not neutral, Off = neutral
J1-19
Horn relay
0.04
12.0
B-
J1-20
Bat-
0.01
B-
Not equipped
Key on
39
Service Manual – SW8000
Control System
Main Machine Controller Sample Voltage Measurements at the J2 Connector
Pin #
Name
J2-1
Pedal high
J2-2
Pedal wiper
J2-3
Pedal low
V-On V-Off Ref. Comments
NA
B-
1.72 full fwd
1.31 neutral
1.214 full rev
4.12
B-
0.01
J2-4 LP low switch
J2-5
Check eng.
input
NA
B-
Low voltage reference output of potentiometer
5.02
B-
Not empty
4.81
B-
Engine running but no check engine signal
Not available
J2-6 Glow plug input
B-
J2-7
NC
B-
J2-8
Dust filter
switch
J2-9
Hopper
interlock
J2-10
Hopper
temperature
0.002
J2-11 Ignition input
13.89
J2-12
Main broom
down
0.003
J2-13
NC
J2-14
Bat-
Not available
5.02
B-
5.02
B-
On = down
5.02
B-
Not available
B5.02
BB-
0.013
High voltage reference output of potentiometer
B-
On = raised
40
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Functional Description
The purpose of the dust control system is to reduce the amount of airborne dust emanating from the machine
during sweeping operations. There are two primary stages in controlling dust from the machine. The
optional DustGuard™ system sprays a fine mist of water in front of each side broom to minimize the dust
created by the side brooms. The vacuum-based dust control system reduces airborne dust inside the hopper
by pulling air through the hopper and through a filter to trap the dust inside the hopper.
DustGuard™ Spray System (optional)
The misting pump pumps water from a separate reservoir to nozzles on the front of the machine. The nozzles
direct a fine stream of water onto the floor in front of the side brooms to help reduce the dust generated by
the brooms.
The DustGuard solenoid valve opens to allow water flow from the misting pump to the nozzles when the
power to the misting pump switches on. A removable Strainer is installed in the water line upstream of the
misting pump and solenoid valve. Removable strainers are also located inside of the nozzle assemblies.
When installed and the manual switch is activated, the DustGuard spray system will turn on automatically
when the side broom is turned on.
Dust Control Vacuum System
The hydraulically driven impeller is mounted in the side wall of the hopper, and pulls air from the hopper
through the filter and discharges it out the rear of the machine.
An optional clogged filter sensor/switch will shut off the vacuum motor if the vacuum on the clean side of the
filter gets too high as a result of a clogged filter. When the switch is activated, the LCD will display an icon
to the operator.
The filter system contains a shaker motor that vibrates the filter to shake loose particulate from the bottom
of the filter to assist in keeping the filter clean. When the shaker switch is pressed, the vacuum motor turns
off and the shaker motor turns on. The shaker motor contains an eccentric weight that causes vibration
when rotated. This reduces filter maintenance and helps maintain adequate airflow through the filter. The
filter shaker will automatically switch on for a short period when the sweep system is turned off (broom
raised).
Circuit Description
Most control circuits are fairly straight forward with the controller completing the electrical circuits to
ground. However, there are some electrical and hydraulic circuits with interdependencies on other circuits.
The electric misting pump is controlled by a relay from the Main Machine Controller. When the mechanical
switch (S26) is closed by the operator, the misting pump relay coil is enabled, but waiting for the controller
to activate the side broom circuit. When the controller sets the side broom output (J1-3) to low voltage
(battery ground) it completes the circuit for both the misting pump relay and the side broom hydraulic valve.
The dust control vacuum motor has two hydraulic interdependencies for it to function. If the hopper is
raised, the entire dust control hydraulic circuit is bypassed through the S6 valve, and none of the dust
control or broom circuits will receive hydraulic power. When the hopper is down, the dust control vacuum
motor is in series with the main broom motor. It will not receive hydraulic power unless the main broom
motor is also active via the S2 Main Broom Enable valve. In its relaxed state, the S8 hydraulic valve will
send fluid through the dust control vacuum motor, but when energized, the valve will bypass the motor to
allow the main broom motor to operate without the vacuum motor operating.
41
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Simplified Schematic Diagram
+
BT
-
BATTERY, 12 Vdc
CB1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 70 AMP
STARTER COMMAND
A3
START
ENGINE
SYSTEM
IGN
BAT
IGN. SW INPUT
SWITCH, IGN.
CB4
ACC
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 AMP
K3
2
1
M2
MOTOR, SHAKER
RELAY, SHAKER
CB6
30
87a
87
1
M
2
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 AMP
RELAY, MISTING PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
CB8
1
K6
2
30
M4
87a
87
+
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 10 A.
(OPTIONAL)
M
-
MISTING PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
K3
J2-9
RELAY, SHAKER
S26
(Closed when
hopper is down)
+5
J1-14
1
K6
2
SWITCH, HOPPER INTERLOCK
+5
SWITCH, MISTING PUMP
J2-8
L3
1
(Closed when
filter is plugged)
S5
1
2
J1-3
2
SWITCH, DUST CONTROL FILTER
(OPTIONAL)
VALVE S3, SIDE BROOM
+5
L4
1
S4
RELAY, MISTING PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
J1-4
2
J2-12
VALVE S4, DUST CONTROL
MISTING SOLENOID
(Open when
broom is down)
1
S2
2
SWITCH, MAIN BROOM
L2
1
J1-6
2
A2
VALVE S2, MAIN BROOM
CONTROL BOX
ASSEMBLY
L8
1
J1-8
2
VALVE S8, DUST CONTROL
VACUUM MOTOR
Side Broom
High Pressure
Steering
Flow Spliter
Low Pressure
Flow Spliter
Sump Return
Main Broom
Enable
Flow Direction
Filter
Pressure
Relief
Cooler
Hopper Up /
Sweep Bypass
Main
Broom
Dust
Bypass
Engine
Vacuum
Motor
Sump
42
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Component Locations
The diagram below shows component locations for some components related to the dust control system.
• Dust Filter
• Vacuum Motor
• DustGuard Nozzles
• Plugged Filter Switch
• Shaker Motor
• Dust Hopper
• Hopper Temp Switch
• Misting Pump
Hopper Temp & Plugged
Filer Switches
K3
Shaker Motor
Relays
K6
Dust Filter
Misting Pump
Hydraulic
Valves
S2
Dust Hopper and
Blower Inlet
S8
Vacuum Motor
DustGuard Spray
Nozzles
43
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Maintenance and Adjustment
Dustguard Spray Nozzle Cleaning
1. For easier access to the nozzles, raise the hopper
slightly.
4
2. Place a container underneath the nozzles to catch any
water that may leak from the hoses.
3. While holding the nozzle body (4) from turning (7/8"
wrench) rotate the nozzle cap (1) 1/4-turn and remove
the nozzle cap, nozzle tip (2), and check valve strainer
(3).
1
2
4. Rinse the nozzle cap, spray nozzle and check valve
strainer in clean water to remove any accumulated dirt
or sediment. If necessary, rinse or soak the components
in vinegar or other commercial cleaner to remove any
mineral deposits.
5. Reassemble the nozzles by following the above
steps in reverse order.
1
4
2
3
Dust Control Filter Cleaning
Caution! Avoid breathing dust or getting debris in your eyes. Wear safety glasses and respiratory
protection when cleaning the filter. Clean the filter in a well ventilated area.
1. Lift the hopper cover and prop it open with the cover prop rod.
2. Disconnect the Shaker Motor Electrical Connector.
3. Remove the 4 thumbnuts (5) that secure the
shaker frame (6), and lift the shaker frame off the
filter (7).
4. Lift the filter out of the machine.
5. Inspect the top of the dust control filter for
damage. A large amount of dust on top of the
filter is usually caused by a hole in the filter or a
damaged filter gasket.
5
6. Vacuum the underside (dirty side) of the filter to
remove loose debris.
7. Loosen additional stuck debris by gently tapping the filter against a flat surface, such as a workbench or
floor.
8. If additional cleaning is necessary, you may use compressed air (less than 100 psi), but do so with
caution. Direct the air through the filter from the clean side to the dirty side.
9. When replacing the filter, make sure the flow direction arrow is pointing up.
44
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Troubleshooting
Dust Control Vacuum Motor will not Run
The dust control hydraulic solenoid valve is normally-active (on when no power is present). So the most
likely cause is a hydraulic problem, but may also be electrical. Isolate the cause using the following steps:
Note: In the decision tree below, all function prerequisites are assumed to be true for the function
to normally be active. For example, the engine is assumed to be at run-speed and the main
broom is active.
Dust control vacuum
motor will not run
Verify that the main
broom is running
Yes
The main broom must be
No active with the throttle position No Troubleshoot the
main broom function
sensor out of neutral before
the vacuum motor will run.
Yes
Disconnect the electrical
Remove the S8 solenoid
No valve and examine it for No Replace the
connector from the S8
solenoid. Does the
a stuck plunger. Replace
vacuum motor
vacuum motor run?
the valve if necessary.
Yes
Done
Done
Inspect the brown wire from
the S8 solenoid to the J1-8
connector on the control
board for a short to ground.
Yes
Repair/replace
the wiring
No
Is the dust control
Yes
LED illuminated on the
control panel display?
Done
Replace the main
control board
No
Done
Turn the machine off. Press and
hold the dust control switch, and Yes
check for continuity between the
J3-1 and J3-10 pins on the
ribbon cable connector.
Replace the main
control board
No
Done
Replace the
display panel
Done
45
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Dust Control Vacuum Motor will not Shut Off
The dust control vacuum motor should turn off while the shaker is running or when the dust control system
is disabled. Failure to turn off is an indication that the bypass solenoid valve is not being activated. The
most likely cause is electrical, but may also be from a stuck solenoid valve. Use the following steps to isolate
the cause:
Note: In the decision tree below, all function prerequisites are assumed to be true for the function
to normally be active.
Dust control vacuum
motor will not stop
Check the voltage at
Yes
the S8 solenoid valve
connector for 12 volts.
Check the coil resistance
of the S8 solenoid. Is it
close to 6.5 ohms?
Yes
No
Check for 12 volts between Yes
the J1-11 and J1-8 pins at
the main control board.
Repair/replace
the wiring
No
Done
Replace the main
control board
Done
No Coil failure. Replace the
coil or the whole solenoid
Valve failure. Replace the
valve or the whole solenoid
46
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Shaker Motor will not Run
If the shaker motor does not operate when the switch is pressed, use the follow steps to isolate the cause:
Note: In the decision tree below, all function prerequisites are assumed to be true for the function
to normally be active.
Shaker motor will not run
when switch is pressed
Verify that the CB6 circuit
breaker is not tripped
Does the shaker LED
illuminate when the shaker
switch is pressed?
No
Yes
First, verify that the LED is functional by
observing it during machine initialization.
Then turn the machine off. Press and
hold the shaker switch, and check for
continuity between the J3-1 and J3-11
pins on the ribbon cable connector.
No
Check for 12 volts at the Yes
shaker motor connector.
Replace the
shaker motor
No
Done
Done
Swap the shaker relay for
an adjacent relay, such as
the horn or lights, and
check the shaker function
Yes Replace the
shaker relay
No
Check for 12 volts between Yes
the J1-11 and J1-14 pins at
the main control board.
No
Replace the main
control board
Done
Replace the
display panel
Done
Check the wiring for
loose connections
or broken wires
Yes
Replace the main
control board
Done
47
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Misting Pump will not Run
Operation of the misting pump relay coil has two dependencies. The misting pump switch must be closed for
positive voltage at the relay coil, and the controller output for the side broom provides the negative voltage
at the coil. If the side broom is functional and in motion, then the controller is known to not be the cause of
the problem. If the side broom is not functioning, then troubleshoot the side broom first. Use the following
steps to isolate the cause.
Misting pump will not run
when the switch is on
The misting pump will not
operate if the side broom(s)
are not running. Troubleshoot
the side brooms first
Verify that the side broom(s) No
are enabled and turning
Yes
If the side brooms are
working, then the control
board is known to be working
Verify that the CB8 circuit
breaker is not tripped
Check for 12 volts at the Yes
misting pump connector.
Replace the
misting pump
No
Done
Swap the misting pump relay
Yes Replace the
for an adjacent relay, such as
misting pump relay
the horn or lights, and check
the misting pump function
No
Unplug the relay
and check the
voltage at the plug
Done
Bat+ to Brn/Blk ≠ 12V
Repair/replace wire to controller
Bat+ to Gra/Orn ≠ 12V
Repair/replace wire to pump
Bat- to Blu ≠ 12V
Confirm 12 volts
at CB8 breaker
Repair/replace wire to breaker
Bat- to Blu/Orn ≠ 12V
Confirm 12 volts
at S26 switch
Repair/replace wire to switch
48
Service Manual – SW8000
Dust Control System
Specifications
Parameter
Range
Misting pump relay coil resistance
• 85 Ω
Shaker motor relay coil resistance
• 90 Ω
Dust control (misting) valve coil resistance
• 85 Ω
Dust control (vacuum) valve coil resistance
• 6 Ω
49
Service Manual – SW8000
50
Electrical System
Functional Description
Overview
The electrical system consists of the switches, gauges and relays on the instrument panel, the circuit
breakers, the drive pedal rotary sensor and the battery. Note that the hydraulic solenoid valves and engine
electrical components are described in the corresponding sections of this manual.
Gauge Panel Assembly
The gauge panel assembly panel includes the Fuel Level Gauge (gas and diesel machines only), Hour Meter,
Panel Assembly, A2 Main Machine Controller and the Starter Switch.
The Panel Assembly contains the touch-pad membrane switches and indicators that allow the Operator to
enable and disable the sweeping functions, raise and lower the hopper, open and close the hopper door,
control the engine speed, sound the horn, and switch the headlights on and off.
The A2 Main Machine Controller is a computerized controller that receives inputs from the membrane switches
and the system components, and provides output voltage to the various solenoid valves, relays, Panel
Assembly indicators, etc.
Fuel Level
Gauge (Gas and
Diesel only)
Panel
Assembly
A2
Control Box
Assembly
Hour
Meter
Starter
Switch
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Circuit Breaker Panel Assembly
The Circuit Breaker Panel assembly is
mounted below the instrument panel
hopper switches and includes the Circuit
Breakers and the SPDT Relays.
Note that diesel models have an additional
SPDT Relay.
Models equipped with the DustGuard™
system have an additional 10-amp Circuit
Breaker and SPDT Relay for the misting
pump.
Models equipped with the optional signal
lights will have an additional 20-amp
Circuit Breaker and SPDT Relay.
Models equipped with the cab HVAC
option will have an additional 20-amp
Circuit Breaker and two additional SPDT
Relays.
Circuit
Breaker
Panel
Circuit
Breakers
Reset
Button
Boot
Cap
Plug (2)
SPDT
Relays
51
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Wire Identification
Wires are color coded and have connector information printed near each end of the wire.
• In the bottom left photo, one side of the blue/black wire goes to the Shaker Relay, K3. The other side of the
wire goes to terminal 2 on Circuit Breaker CB6.
• In the bottom right photo, one side of the gray/blue wire goes to pin J1-17 on the A2 Main Machine
Controller. The other side of the wire goes to terminal K on connector X2.
Rotary Sensor
The Rotary Sensor (referred to as
the Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm on
the Wiring Diagram) is a rotary
potentiometer that is connected to
the Lever Weldment. As the Lever
Weldment rotates to drive the
machine forward or backward,
the resistance through the Rotary
Sensor changes proportionately.
The machine is programmed so
the Rotary Sensor is in its “deadband” resistance range when the
Lever Weldment is in the neutral
position.
The A2 Main Machine Controller
must detect the Rotary Sensor in
its dead-band range before the
engine can be started.
Lever
Weldment
Rotary
Sensor
52
HEATER TEMP.
CONTROL
VIO/GRA
R
BLK
B
M6/M9
YEL
RED
ORN
YEL
RED
ORN
RED/WHT
-
BLK
Service ManualM– SW8000
S35
2
1
MOTOR, BLOWER MOTOR
M10
YEL
RED
BLK
M ORN
WHT
SW SPST
MOTOR, BLOWER MOTOR
K9
S33
BLU
OR FAN
1
BLK/WHT
to
K10
S34
2
1
GRN
2
87a
GRN/WHT 30
THERMOSTAT
L10
87 BLU/BRN
1
2
BLK
+
M3
DIESEL AND GAS ONLY
D
D PINK/YEL + M PINK/YEL
Machines
also equipped
with
the Litter Vac Kit option
FUEL PUMP OUTPUT
FUEL PUMP
X1
have a parking Brake
C
C S22
BLK/REDSwitch
BLK/REDand Seat Relay K11 that
GROUND
STARTER COMMAND
will bypass the
Seat Switch S21 when the parking brake
ENGINE LIGHT
MIL OUTPUT
A3
X1
is engaged.(SWITCHED
This allows
the
engine to
runCHECK
to operate
OUTPUT
TO CONTROL the
G
G GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
BOX ASSEMBLY
GROUND)
ENGINE SYSTEM
Litter Vac with the Operator off of the seat.
REFERENCE:
X1
56107658 - DIAGRAM-WIRING KUBOTA GAS
56107659 - DIAGRAM-WIRING KUBOTA LP
DIESEL DIAGRAM ON PAGE 3
THROTTLE INPUT
(12V FOR HIGH)
GRA/BLU
K
X2
K
GRA/BLU
X3
A
GRA/BLU
SEAT SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
WITH LIGHT OPTION
B+
12V
2
CONNECT TO
CONTROL BOX
ASSEMBLY
IGN. SW INPUT
RPLE ALT. EXCITE
TAN
F
A
B
F
I
BLK
B
COIL, RELAY SEAT
SWITCH, IGN.
ST
IGN
BAT
TAN
ACC
K11
87a
87 RED/YEL
30
RED/BLK
RELAY, SEAT
S21
SW SEAT
RED/BLK
• When K12 sees voltage at terminal T it energizes and
1sendsNOTE:
the voltage available on terminal 15 through
P3 AND R3 ARE NOT USED ON L.P. MODEL
R3
terminal
53s to circuit breaker CB5, then to the engine
S
1
2
GRA/BLK
controller. Without this power
SENDER,to
FUELthe engine controller
GAUGE,
FUEL
the
engine
will
not
run.
Note
that:
BLK
3
HOUR METER
YEL/BLK
P2
GRA
S1
4
• When the Operator sits on the seat and closes the Seat
Switch S21, this provides positive voltage to terminal T
P1
1
2
on
K12.BLK
4 h 3 VIO
OUTPUT
GRA
GRA
TO SP6
A5
BLK/GRN 1
K11
X58 X57
A
A
1
GRN/YEL
TO K5
• The ignition switch
voltage
to
B
B positive
GRN/WHT provides
GRN/WHT 2
3
C
C GRN/RED 3
GRN/RED
2
terminal 15 on the
.5
sec.
Delay
Relay
K12
.
Terminal
53M
D
D WHT/GRN 4
WHT/GRN
1
SENSOR,
GASOLINE
on
the
K12 is connected
to
battery
ground.
X2
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
D
BLK/GRN
B-
S22
SWITCH, BRAKE
The seat switch and brake switch circuits work as follows:
NK
53
RELAY, COMPRESSOR
STARTER B+
NK
DEL: T
A-08928
UPDATE: SHEET 1 &
MAIN MACHINE CON
ASSEMBLY, RELAY
RELAY .5 SEC DELA
ONLY
A-09080
UPDATE: SENSOR,
GASOLINE(GM ENG
VALVE, COMPRESSOR
PRESSURE
The
SeatBLKSwitch S21 and SWITCH,
.5 sec.
Delay Relay K12 are installed on Nilfisk machines only and will shut off the
M
MOTOR, CONDENSER
FAN if the Operator leaves the seat for more than one-half second.
engine
M8
7a
7
C
D
RELAY, CONDENSOR FAN
BLK
Seat Switch Circuit Description
WHT
Electrical System
1 BLOWER MOTOR FOR
PRESSURIZED AND HEATED CAB,
2 BLOWER MOTORS FOR A/C
A-08898
2
RED/BLK
1 RED/YEL
K12
15
53m
T
31
53s
.5 SEC
BLK
ORN/GRN
TO CB5
RED/YEL
RELAY, .5 SEC DELAY ON BREAK
-- If the1 voltage
from the Seat Switch
S21 to terminal
2
BLK
LIGHT,
STROBE
T on K12(OPTIONAL)
is interrupted
for one-half second or less,
M2
MOTOR, SHAKER
K3
87a
K12 will continue to send voltage through terminal
30
87
1 M 2
BLU/GRN
WHT
BLK
RELAY, SHAKER 53s to circuit breaker CB5 to allow the engine to
H1
K1
continue to run.
87a
LP12
87
RELAY, HORN
WHT/YEL
1
2
1
2
2
L
FLASHER
(OPTIONAL)
YEL 2
-
BLK
RED/BLK
ACC
M7
-
TER FAN
ON)
BLK
87a
87 RED/YEL
RELAY, SEAT
WHT
BLK
REDwith
GRA
-S26
- On machines not equipped
the light option,
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, RIGHT REAR TAIL/BRAKE
the
Brake Switch S22 gets positive
voltage from the
LP6
1
VIO/YEL
3
BLK
WHT
GRN
GRN
BLK
ignition
switch.
(OPTIONAL)
S21
SW SEAT
2
RED/BLK
1 RED/YEL
K12
BLK
15
53m
T
31
53s
.5 SEC
BLK
ORN/GRN
TO CB5
RED/YEL
RELAY, .5 SEC DELAY ON BREAK
LAMP, LEFT FRONT SIGNAL
LP7
BLK
WHT
BLK
• The closed Brake SwitchGRNS22 provides
positive voltage
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, LEFT REAR SIGNAL
to energize the Seat Relay Coil K11
,
which
closes
the
LP8
BLK
YEL/BLK
WHT
RED
GRA K11
contacts on the Seat Relay
. The
Seat Relay K11 BLK
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, LEFT REAR TAIL/BRAKE
contacts provide positive voltageLP9to terminal T on
1
2
YEL/BLK
BLK
(OPTIONAL)
K12, bypassing the Seat Switch S21
. K12 sends voltage
CURB LAMP
through terminal 53s to circuit breaker
CB5 and the
LP11
21
2
YEL/BLK 1
BLK
(OPTIONAL)
engine controller to allow the engine
to
run
with the
LAMP, REAR WORK
Operator off of the seat.
BLK
TING PUMP
)
K11
30
RED/BLK
LP5
SWITCH, TURN SIGNAL
(OPTIONAL)
WIPER
ON)
ED SWITCH)
MP, DOME
ON)
BLK 7
IGN
BAT
BLK
LP4
-- On machines equipped
with
the
light option, the
BLK
WHT
S25
VIO/YEL
BLK
(OPTIONAL)
3 VIO/YEL
YEL 2
Switch S22 gets positive voltage
from
6Brake
YEL 5
GRN
LAMP, RIGHT REAR
SIGNALrelay K5.
YEL/BLK
BLK
B
S1
S22
SWITCH, HAZARD
(OPTIONAL)
GRA
SWITCH, IGN.
ST
• If the machine is equipped withLP2the
HEAD Litter
LIGHT, RIGHTVac Kit,
1
2
YEL/BLK
BLK
the parking brake
will
close
the Brake Switch
2 engaging
GRA
HEAD LIGHT, LEFT
LP3
SWITCH, BRAKE
S22.
BLK
WHT
VIO/YEL
BLK
1
K11
GRA
COIL, RELAY SEAT
RED/BLK
X
X58 X17
A
A
1
B
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, RIGHT FRONT
E13
M
SWITCH, BRAKE
BLK
HORN Seat Switch S21 to terminal T
-- If the voltage
from the
K5
BLK
on K12 isRELAY,
interrupted
for more than one-half second,
SIGNAL LIGHTS
K8
(OPTIONAL)
BLK
K12 will cut
off the voltage to terminal
53s and
RELAY, HVAC
circuit
breaker CB5 to shut off
the
engine.
(OPTIONAL)
LP1
YEL/BLK
BS22
COMBINATION GAUGE OPTION
GRA/BLK
P3
VIO
4
7
4
2
2
7
6
3
5
1
R1
6
WHT/BLK 1
2
SENDER, OIL PRESSURE
BLK
1
YEL/BLK
30
SEAT SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
WITHOUT LIGHT OPTION
B+
12V
3
5 GAUGE, COMBINATION
TAN
BLK
M4
GRA/ORN
+
M
-
MISTING PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
BLK
BLK
NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS APPLY AFTER
PLATING AND HEAT TREATING,
BUT BEFORE PAINTING.
4. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
EDGES.
DIM. IN [ ] ARE MM.
UNITS IN [ ] ARE ISO METRIC
AS NOTED.
DRAWN
6-27-11
PMO
NILFISK-ADV
CHECKED
PLYMOUTH, M
PROJ ENG
APPROVED
6-27-11
WGL
TITLE
DIAGRAM-LA
APPROVED
APPROVED
FIRST USED ON
SIZE
ORCAD
SW8000
CODE
5
E
SCALE
NONE
ASSY.
56507E11
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Component Locations
The following components are included in this section:
• Battery
• Instrument Panel Assembly
• Circuit Breakers
• SPDT Relays
• K11 Seat Relay Coil and K12 Timer Relay
• S22 Brake Switch
• Rotary Sensor
Battery
The Battery is mounted on the lefthand side of the machine frame,
just behind the left front wheel.
Battery
54
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Instrument Panel Assembly
The A2 Main Machine
Controller, Hour Meter and
Starter Switch are mounted
on the Panel Assembly.
Note that Gas and Diesel
models also have a Fuel
Level Gauge mounted
on the Panel Assembly
adjacent to the Hour Meter.
Hour
Meter
A2 Main
Machine
Controller
Starter
Switch
Panel
Assembly
Circuit Breakers
The machine Circuit Breakers
are mounted on the Circuit
Breaker Panel, located below the
instrument panel hopper switches.
Circuit
Breaker
(typical)
Note that additional Circuit
Breakers are installed on machines
equipped with the optional
DustGuard™ system, optional
signal lights and the cab HVAC
option.
Circuit
Breaker
Panel
55
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
SPDT Relays
The SPDT (single pole, double throw) Relays are
mounted on the back of the Circuit Breaker Panel,
located below the instrument panel hopper
switches.
Note that diesel models have an additional SPDT
Relay.
Circuit
Breaker
(typical)
Additional SPDT Relays are also installed on
machines equipped with the optional DustGuard™
system, optional signal lights and the cab HVAC
option.
SPDT
Relay
(typical)
Circuit
Breaker
Panel
(rear)
Signal Lights
Relay K5
(location)
Circuit
Breaker
Panel
Horn
Relay K1
Lights
Relay K2
Shaker
Relay K3
Neutral
Relay K4
Misting Pump
Relay K6
Cab
HVAC
Relay
(location)
Diesel
Relay K7
(location)
K11 Seat Relay Coil and K12 Timer Relay (seat switch option only)
The K11 Seat Relay Coil and K12
Timer Relay are mounted on the
front of the frame behind the
Hopper and rubber cover.
K11 Seat
Relay Coil
K12 Timer
Relay
56
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
S22 Brake Switch (seat switch option only)
The S22 Brake Switch is located
adjacent to the Brake Pedal and is
actuated when the parking brake
is engaged.
S22 Brake
Switch
Rotary Sensor
The Rotary Sensor is fastened to
the mount plate, which is mounted
to the RTN Bracket.
RTN
Bracket
Rotary
Sensor
57
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Electrical Connectors
The following tables list the machine components and their assigned connector or relay, and the individual
connector pin-out assignments. The Connector Pin-out Assignments tables include connector illustrations
to help you identify the various connectors on the machine.
If you are viewing this document on a computer, you can search for the component name or connector ID
to find the pin-out assignments. However, if you are viewing a paper copy, it will be easier for you to find
the correct pin-out assignment table for a particular component if you know the connector ID. To get the
connector ID, find the component name from the Wiring Harness Diagram, then use the Component to
Connector ID Look-up Table below to find the corresponding connector ID.
Component to Connector ID Look-up Table
Component Name
Connector ID
A2 Main Machine Controller
J1
A2 Main Machine Controller
J2
Engine System
X1
Engine System
X2
Seat Switch, S21
X12
Brake Switch, S22
X17
Shaker Motor
X40
Back Up Alarm (optional)
X46
Strobe (optional)
X76
Fuel Pump
X37
Hopper Interlock Switch, S4
X50
Main Broom Switch, S2
X52
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm
X47
L1 - Hopper Door Close/Open Valve, S1
X86
L2 - Main Broom Valve, S2
X96
L3 - Side Broom Valve, S3
X97
L4 - Dust Control Valve, S4
X98
L5 - Hopper Up/Down Valve, S5
X99
L6 - Hopper Up/Bypass Valve, S6
X100
L7 - Hopper Door Valve, S7
X101
L8 - Dust Control Bypass Valve, S8
X102
L9 - Hopper Lower Valve, S9
X103
58
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Component to Relay ID Look-up Table
Component Name
Relay ID
Horn Relay
K1
Lights Relay
K2
Shaker Relay
K3
Neutral Relay
K4
Signal Lights Relay
K5
Seat Relay
K11
0.5 Second Delay Relay
K12
Connector Pin-out Assignments
Connector J1, A2 Main Machine Controller – Molex Mini Fit Jr. 39012205
Pin#
Component Assignment
Wire Color
J1-1
Hopper Open/Close Solenoid Valve, S1
BLU/WHT 18-1
J1-2
Main Broom Solenoid Valve, S2
GRN/GRA 18-1
J1-3
Side Broom Solenoid Valve, S3
BRN/BLK 18-1
J1-4
Dust Control Solenoid Valve, S4
BRN/YEL 18-1
J1-5
Hopper Up/Down Solenoid Valve, S5
Compressor Relay, K10 (optional)
RED/GRA 18-1
J1-6
Hopper Up/Bypass Solenoid Valve, S6
BLU/GRA 18-1
J1-7
Hopper Open Solenoid Valve, S7
BLK/WHT 18-1
J1-8
Dust Control Bypass Solenoid Valve, S8
BRN 18-1
J1-9
Hopper Lower Solenoid Valve, S9
YEL/GRN 18-1
J1-10 Ground
BLK 18-1
J1-11 Acc. Input
VIO 18-3
J1-12 Not Used
–
J1-13 Not Used
–
J1-14 Shaker Relay, K3
YEL/RED 18-1
J1-15 Back Up Alarm (optional)
GRN/BRN 18-1
J1-16 Lights Relay, K2
YEL/WHT 18-1
J1-17
Throttle Output to Engine System
(+12 V for High Speed)
GRA/BLU 18-1
J1-18 Neutral Relay, K4
GRA/WHT 18-1
J1-19 Horn Relay, K1
VIO/BRN 18-1
J1-20 Ground
BLK 18-2
59
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Connector J2, A2 Main Machine Controller – Molex Mini Fit Jr. 39012145-14
Pin#
Component Assignment
Wire Color
J2-1
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm (3), 5v Reference
YEL/GRA 18-1
J2-2
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm (2), Wiper
ORN/GRA 18-1
J2-3
Drive Pedal Sensor, 5K Ohm (1), Ground
BRN/WHT 18-1
J2-4
Low LP Pressure Switch, S3
GRA/YEL 18-1
J2-5
Check Engine Output from Engine System
GRN/YEL 18-1
J2-6
Glow Plug Indicator Light (diesel only)
GRN/RED 18-1–
J2-8
Dust Control Filter Switch, S5 (optional)
WHT/GRA 18-1
J2-9
Hopper Interlock Switch, S4
RED/BLK 18-1
J2-7
–
J2-10 140° F. Hopper Temperature Switch, S6 (optional)
YEL/VIO 18-1
J2-11 Ign. Input
PINK 18-1
J2-12 Main Broom Switch, S2
ORN/BLK 18-1
J2-13
–
J2-14 Ground
Horn Relay, K1 – Bosch 3334485007
Pin#
Wire Color
BLK 18-3
Lights Relay, K2 – Bosch 3334485007
Pin#
Wire Color
85
VIO/BRN 18-1
30
GRA/RED 14-1
87
WHT/YEL 18-1
85
YEL/WHT 18-1
87a
–
87a
–
30
VIO 16-2
86
VIO 16-3
30
VIO 16-3
86
VIO 16-4
86
VIO 16-2
87
YEL/BLK 16-1
86
VIO 16-1
87
YEL/BLK 16-2
60
Service Manual – SW8000
Shaker Relay, K3 – Tyco 1393310-4
Pin#
Wire Color
Electrical System
Neutral Relay, K4 – Bosch 3334485007
Pin#
Wire Color
30
BLU/BLK 12-1
30
RED/GRN 16-1
85
YEL/RED 18-1
86
GRA/WHT 18-1
87
BLU/GRN 12-1
87
–
86
VIO 18-1
87a
BLU/PINK 16-1
86
VIO 16-4
85
PINK 16-2
85
PINK 16-3
Signal Lights Relay, K5 – Bosch
3334485007
Seat Relay, K11 – Bosch 3334485007
Pin#
Wire Color
Pin#
Wire Color
30
ORN 16-1
30
RED/BLK 18-5
85
BLK 18-10
30
RED/BLK 18-4
85
BLK 18-25
30
RED/BLK 18-3
87a
–
85
GRA 18-6
87
GRN/YEL 16-3
86
BLK 18-39
87
GRN/YEL 16-4
87
RED/YEL 18-2
86
VIO 18-1
86
VIO 18-2
61
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
0.5 Second Delay Relay, K12 – Cobo
30-16-07811
Pin#
Wire Color
15
RED/BLK 18-2
15
RED/BLK 18-3
53M
BLK 18-38
53M
BLK 18-39
53s
ORN/GRN 16-1
T
RED/YEL 18-1
T
RED/YEL 18-2
Engine System Connector, X1 – Delphi 15326868
Pin#
Component Assignment
Wire Color
A
Ignition Switch Input to A3
PINK 16-4
B
Alt. Excite on A3
PINK 16-7
C
Fuel Pump Output
BLK/RED 16-1
D
Fuel Pump Output
PINK/YEL 16-1
E
–
F
Starter Command
BLU/PINK 16-1
G
MIL Output (switched ground)
GRN/YEL 18-1
H
–
J
–
K
–
L
–
M
–
N
–
P
–
R
–
S
–
62
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Engine System Connector, X2 – Delphi 15326863
Pin#
Component Assignment
Wire Color
A
–
B
–
C
–
D
–
E
F
–
Coolant Temperature Output
TAN 18-1
G
–
H
–
J
–
K
Throttle Input (12V for high)
GRA/BLU 18-1
L
–
M
–
N
–
P
–
R
–
S
–
Two-pin Connectors – Delphi 12015792
ID
Name
X12
Seat Switch, S21
X17
Brake Switch, S22
X40
Shaker Motor
X46
Back Up Alarm
(optional)
X76
Strobe (optional)
Pin#
Wire Color
A
RED/YEL 18-1
B
RED/BLK 18-4
A
RED/BLK 18-5
B
GRA 18-6
A
BLU/GRN 14-1
B
BLK 14-1
A
VIO 18-17
B
GRN/BRN 18-1
A
VIO 18-16
B
BLK 18-22
63
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Two-pin Connectors – Delphi 12010973
ID
Name
X37
Fuel Pump
X50
Hopper Interlock
Switch, S4
X52
Main Broom
Switch, S2
Pin#
Wire Color
A
PINK/YEL 16-1
B
BLK/RED 16-1
A
RED/BLK 18-1
B
BLK 18-6 18-6
A
ORN/BLK 18-1
B
BLK 18-7
Three-pin Connector – Delphi 12162182
ID
X47
Name
Drive Pedal
Sensor, 5K Ohm
Pin#
Wire Color
A
BRN/WHT 18-1
B
ORN/GRA 18-1
C
YEL/GRA 18-1
64
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Two-pin Connectors – Deutsch DT06-2S
ID
Name
X86
L1 - Hopper Door Close/Open Valve, S1
X96
L2 - Main Broom Valve, S2
X97
L3 - Side Broom Valve, S3
X98
L4 - Dust Control Valve, S4
X99
L5 - Hopper Up/Down Valve, S5
X100
L6 - Hopper Up/Bypass Valve, S6
X101
L7 - Hopper Door Valve, S7
X102
L8 - Dust Control Bypass Valve, S8
X103
L9 - Hopper Lower Valve, S9
Pin#
Wire Color
1
VIO 18-4
2
BLU/WHT 18-1
1
VIO 18-7
2
GRN/GRA 18-1
1
VIO 18-8
2
BRN/BLK 18-2
1
VIO 18-10
2
BRN/YEL 18-1
1
VIO 18-5
2
RED/GRA 18-1
1
VIO/18-11
2
BLU/GRA 18-1
1
VIO 18-12
2
BLK/WHT 18-1
1
VIO 18-13
2
BRN 18-1
1
VIO 18-23
2
YEL/GRN 18-1
65
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
No power to the
machine
Discharged battery.
Check the battery voltage and charge as necessary.
Poor battery connection(s).
Check the battery cables, terminals and connections
and tighten/repair/replace as necessary.
Battery needs to be replaced.
Perform a load test on the battery and replace if
necessary.
Note: Refer to the individual machine system sections for electrical troubleshooting procedures.
Specifications
Component
Specifications
Coil Operating Current – 160 mA
Coil Resistance – 85 ± 5 ohms
SPDT Relay (R1, R2, R3, R4,
R5 and R6)
Pull-in Voltage – 8 volts
Release Voltage – 1.0 to 5.0 volts
66
Service Manual – SW8000
67
Electrical System
Wiring Diagrams, p/n 56382530, Rev. D
CONFIDENTIAL
+
RED
BT
-
THIS DRAWING AND THE DESIGN REPRESENTED HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF NILFISK-ADVANCE, INC.,
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA AND IT HAS BEEN ISSUED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE REPRODUCED NOR COPIED NOR USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS ISSUED AND RECIPIENT
AGREES TO RETURN IT UPON REQUEST.
BLK
DWG. NO.
Note: Refer to the individual machine system sections for
the system ladder diagrams and circuit descriptions.
1
K8
2
30
RED/VIO
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 A.
87a
87
REV
HEATER TEMP.
CONTROL
VIO/GRA
RELAY, HVAC
L
M
H
C
BLK
YEL
RED
ORN
YEL
RED
ORN
RED/WHT
S35
SWITCH, FAN
2
1
B
-
M
S33
K9
+
BLU
1
BLK/WHT
M8
87a
87
K9
to
K10
S34
2
M
D
RELAY, CONDENSOR FAN
BLK
1
GRN
2
87a
GRN/WHT 30
THERMOSTAT
-
C
1 BLOWER MOTOR FOR
PRESSURIZED AND HEATED CAB,
2 BLOWER MOTORS FOR A/C
MOTOR, BLOWER MOTOR
WHT
30
BLK
MOTOR, BLOWER MOTOR
M10
YEL
RED
BLK
M ORN
WHT
SW SPST
HVAC OPTION
RED
A
M6/M9
S30
B
VIO/GRA
REVISIONS
DFTM
DATE
APPD
9-24-12
PMO
HH
RELEASE
A-08898
12-13-12
PMO
HH
DEL: TAN/BRN WIRE
A-08928
12-18-12
PMO
HH
UPDATE: SHEET 1 & 3 ORN/GRN WAS ORN/GRA,
MAIN MACHINE CONTROLLER WAS CONTROL BOX
ASSEMBLY, RELAY .5 SEC DELAY ON BREAK WAS
RELAY .5 SEC DELAY. ADD; DIESEL AND GAS
ONLY
A-09080
2-8-13
PMO
HH
UPDATE: SENSOR, GASOLINE WAS SENSOR,
GASOLINE(GM ENGINE)
ECO
A-08718
L10
87 BLU/BRN
1
2
RELAY, COMPRESSOR
BLK
VALVE, COMPRESSOR
SWITCH, PRESSURE
BLK
RED
RELAY, CONDENSOR FAN
MOTOR, CONDENSER FAN
STARTER B+
RED
D
PINK/YEL
FUEL PUMP OUTPUT
2
CB1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 70 AMP
1
GRN/BLK
X1
F BLU/PINK
ENGINE SYSTEM
IGN
BAT
RED/BLK
REFERENCE:
56107658 - DIAGRAM-WIRING KUBOTA GAS
56107659 - DIAGRAM-WIRING KUBOTA LP
DIESEL DIAGRAM ON PAGE 3
THROTTLE INPUT
(12V FOR HIGH)
PINK/YEL
C
BLK/RED
+
M
DIESEL AND GAS ONLY
-
FUEL PUMP
G
X1
G
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
CHECK ENGINE LIGHT
OUTPUT TO CONTROL
BOX ASSEMBLY
SEAT SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
WITH LIGHT OPTION
GRA/BLU
CONNECT TO
CONTROL BOX
ASSEMBLY
2
GRA/BLU
K
X2
K
GRA/BLU
2
PINK
A
PINK
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 10 AMP
H
ACC
B
PINK
X1
X1
X1
X3
A
A
BLK/GRN 1
4
GRN/WHT
B
B
GRN/WHT 2
3
GRN/RED
C
C
GRN/RED 3
2
WHT/GRN
D
D
WHT/GRN 4
BLK/GRN
A
PINK
IGN. SW INPUT
H
B PURPLE ALT. EXCITE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
OUTPUT
F
TAN
X2
B
1
2
VIO
1
4
VIO
GRA
SWITCH, IGN.
ST
1
SENSOR, GASOLINE
IGN
BAT
D
F
TAN
ACC
K11
2
3
h
BLK
VIO
I
S
15
1
GRA/BLK
GAUGE, FUEL
2
1 RED/YEL
53m
T
2
.5 SEC
SENDER, FUEL
3
S21
SW SEAT
RED/BLK
K12
NOTE:
P3 AND R3 ARE NOT USED ON L.P. MODEL
1
R3
VIO
87a
87 RED/YEL
30
RELAY, SEAT
HOUR METER
YEL/BLK
P2
BLK
S1
A5
P1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 AMP
GRA
GRN/YEL
TO K5
RED/BLK
GRN/BLU
GRA
B
COIL, RELAY SEAT
RED/BLK
CB4
K11
X58 X57
A
A
1
PINK
TO MAIN MACHINE
CONTROLER
B-
S22
SWITCH, BRAKE
TO SP6
ORN/GRN 1
SWITCH, IGN.
GRN/YEL
CB5
53S
15
X1
M3
D
B+
12V
MIL OUTPUT
(SWITCHED
GROUND)
A3
REMOVE JUMPER WHEN SEAT SWITCH
OPTION IS INSTALLED
X1
GROUND
STARTER COMMAND
JUMPER INSTALLED BETWEEN 15 TO 53S AT K12
SOCKET WITH NO SEAT SWITCH
ST
GRN/BLU
F
BLU/PINK
RELAY, NEUTRAL
(CLOSED IN NEUTRAL)
CB3
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15 AMP
S1
87a
87
30
RED/GRN
1
C
BLK/RED
K4
2
RED
1 OF 3
E1
CB9
RED
SHEET
56382530
BATTERY, 12 Vdc
BLK
31
53s
ORN/GRN
TO CB5
RED/YEL
RELAY, .5 SEC DELAY ON BREAK
BLK
LP12
1
VIO
1
RED
2
BLK
LIGHT, STROBE
(OPTIONAL)
CB6
K3
2
30
BLU/BLK
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 AMP
87a
87
BLU/GRN
WHT
M2
MOTOR, SHAKER
1
M
SEAT SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
WITHOUT LIGHT OPTION
B+
12V
2
B-
BLK
S22
RELAY, SHAKER
K1
30
RED
VIO
SWITCH, BRAKE
H1
87a
87
2
WHT/YEL
RELAY, HORN
1
2
X58 X17
A
A
1
BLK
B
K11
GRA
GRA
COIL, RELAY SEAT
HORN
K5
BLK
B
VIO
BLK
S1
RELAY, SIGNAL LIGHTS
(OPTIONAL)
VIO
RELAY, HVAC
(OPTIONAL)
K2
2
87a
87
30
GRA/RED
LP1
YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK
1
YEL/BLK
1
RELAY, LIGHTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 AMP
1
GRN/YEL
S22
2
BLK
WHT
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, RIGHT FRONT
LP4
BLK
WHT
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, RIGHT REAR SIGNAL
LP5
BLK
WHT
RED
(OPTIONAL)
E13
1
RED
2
ORN
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 A.
(OPTIONAL)
30
87a
87
GRN/YEL
X
GRN/YEL
L
RELAY, SIGNAL LIGHTS
(OPTIONAL)
FLASHER
(OPTIONAL)
S25
YEL 2
YEL 5
VIO/YEL
3
6
K11
HEAD LIGHT, LEFT
VIO/YEL
K5
RED/BLK
ACC
BLK
VIO/YEL
GRN
SWITCH, HAZARD
(OPTIONAL)
YEL/BLK
GRA
S26
RELAY, SEAT
BLK
BLK
S21
SW SEAT
M5
+
YEL 2
-
M
BLK
1
3
15
BLK
53m
T
SWITCH, TURN SIGNAL
(OPTIONAL)
MOTOR ASM, WIPER
(CAB OPTION)
(INCLUDES 2 SPEED SWITCH)
M7
2+
1
GRN/YEL
M
GRN
BLK
GRN
BLK
YEL/BLK
GRA
BLK
RED
1
YEL/BLK
MOTOR, DEFROSTER FAN
(CAB OPTION)
GRN/YEL
S24
RED
1
F1
2
1
RED
FUSE, 1A.
2 1
SW SPST
LP14
21
2
LAMP, DOME
(CAB OPTION)
1
LP10
2
(OPTIONAL)
TROUBLE LAMP
CB8
RED
RED
1
K6
2
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 10 A.
(OPTIONAL)
BLU
30
YEL/BLK
BLK
1
WHT
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, LEFT FRONT SIGNAL
LP7
WHT
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, LEFT REAR SIGNAL
LP8
WHT
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, LEFT REAR TAIL/BRAKE
LP9
2
(OPTIONAL)
CURB LAMP
21
LP11
2
(OPTIONAL)
LAMP, REAR WORK
BLK
87a
87
RELAY, MISTING PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
NOTES: 1. REFERENCE 56382531 DIAGRAM-WIRING
BLK
BLK
31
53s
ORN/GRN
TO CB5
RED/YEL
LP6
VIO/YEL
GRN
1 RED/YEL
K12
LAMP, RIGHT REAR TAIL/BRAKE
BLK 7
2
RED/BLK
.5 SEC
GRN/YEL
87a
87 RED/YEL
30
RED/BLK
LP3
SWITCH, BRAKE
CB7
BLK
LP2 HEAD LIGHT, RIGHT
2
GRA
IGN
BAT
2
RED/BLK
VIO
CB2
1
RED
SWITCH, IGN.
ST
BLK
RELAY, .5 SEC DELAY ON BREAK
BLK
COMBINATION GAUGE OPTION
BLK
GRA/BLK
P3
VIO
4
BLK
7
4
2
2
7
6
3
5
1
R1
6
WHT/BLK 1
BLK
1
3
5 GAUGE, COMBINATION
TAN
BLK
M4
GRA/ORN
+
M
-
MISTING PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
BLK
BLK
NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS APPLY AFTER
PLATING AND HEAT TREATING,
BUT BEFORE PAINTING.
4. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
EDGES.
DIM. IN [ ] ARE MM.
UNITS IN [ ] ARE ISO METRIC
AS NOTED.
DRAWN
Notes: 1. Reference 56382531 Wiring Harness Diagram
6-27-11
PMO
NILFISK-ADVANCE, INC.
CHECKED
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA 55447-3408
PROJ ENG
APPROVED
6-27-11
WGL
TITLE
DIAGRAM-LADDER
APPROVED
APPROVED
FIRST USED ON
FORMS.DSN - E SIZE FORM 4/24/96
2
SENDER, OIL PRESSURE
BLK
YEL/BLK
K8
SIZE
ORCAD
SW8000
CODE
DWG. NO.
56382530
E
SCALE
NONE
ASSY.
56507E11
SHEET
REV.
D
1 OF 3
DSN - E SIZE FORM 4/24/96
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Wiring Diagrams, p/n 56382530, Rev. D, sheet 2 of 3
VIO
BLK
VIO
J1-11
J2-6
(ACC INPUT)
L1
1
VIO
2
BLU/WHT
(IGN. INPUT)
J1-1
J2-11
GRN/RED
PINK
VALVE S1, HOPPER CLOSE/OPEN
2
GRN/GRA
J1-18
GRA/WHT
J1-17
GRA/BLU
J2-1
BRN/WHT
J2-2
ORN/GRA
J2-3
YEL/GRA
J1-2
RELAY, NEUTRAL
VALVE S2, MAIN BROOM
L3
1
VIO
2
BRN/BLK
2
3
K6
BLK/ORN
BLU/ORN
SWITCH, MISTING PUMP
GRA/BLU
BRN/BLK
2
BRN/YEL
(CLOSES WITH
HIGH HOPPER
TEMPERATURE)
J1-4
VALVE S4, DUST CONTROL
J2-10
K10
VIO
YEL/VIO
2
1
RED/GRA
RELAY, COMPRESSOR
(OPTIONAL)
L5
1
2
VIO
J1-5
(CLOSED WHEN
HOPPER IS
DOWN)
RED/GRA
L6
1
VIO
1
VIO
1
J2-9
2
BLU/GRA
J1-6
BLK/WHT
J1-7
S6
t
3
BLK
140 DEG. F
SWITCH, HOPPER TEMP.
(OPTIONAL)
VALVE S5, HOPPER UP/DOWN
VIO
3
DRIVE PEDAL SENSOR, 5K OHM
L4
1
2
R2
1
RELAY, MISTING PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
VIO
TROTTLE OUTPUT TO ENGINE SYSTEM
(+ 12 V FOR HIGH SPEED)
J1-3
VALVE S3, SIDE BROOM
S26
VIO
FROM IGNITION
CIRCUIT
K4
L2
1
VIO
GLOW PLUG SIGNAL
(DIESEL ENGINE ONLY)
GRN/RED
PINK
RED/BLK
1
S4
2
BLK
SWITCH, HOPPER INTERLOCK
VALVE S6, HOPPER UP/BYPASS
GRN/YEL
(MIL INPUT) J2-5
L7
2
VALVE S7, HOPPER OPEN
L8
2
L9
2
VIO
WHT/GRA
CLOSES WHEN FILTER IS
PLUGGED)
S5
1
J1-9
1
2
GRN/BRN
J1-15
BACK UP ALARM
K1
2
BLK
SWITCH, DUST CONTROL FILTER
(OPTIONAL)
A2
YEL/GRN
VALVE S9, HOPPER LOWER
H2
J2-8
J1-8
VALVE S8, DUST CONTROL BYPASS
1
VIO
BRN
CHECK ENGINE OUTPUT
FROM ENGINE SYSTEM
MAIN MACHINE
CONTROLLER
J2-4
GRA/YEL
(CLOSES WHEN TANK
IS EMPTY)
S3
1
2
BLK
SWITCH, LOW LP PRESSURE
(OPTIONAL)
VIO
VIO/BRN
J1-19
J2-12
(OPEN WHEN
BROOM IS DOWN)
ORN/BLK
1
K2
VIO
YEL/WHT
2
BLK
K3
YEL/RED
J1-10
BLK
J1-20
BLK
J2-14
BLK
J1-16
RELAY, LIGHTS
VIO
S2
SWITCH, MAIN BROOM
RELAY, HORN
J1-14
RELAY, SHAKER
TPS1
1
2
TPS2
1
J3-4
ENGINE SPEED
2
TPS3
1
J3-2
J4-8
D1
2
J3-3
LIGHTS
TPS4
1
2
J4-10
LED, SERVICE INDICATOR
D2
J4-6
LED, DUST CONTROL FILTER
D3
J3-11
SHAKER
J4-5
TPS5
1
TOUCH PAD
SWITCHES
LED, GLOW PLUG
2
TPS6
1
TPS7
J3-10
DUST CONTROL
2
1
D4
J4-3
LED, SERVICE ENG. (MIL)
D5
J3-9
J4-2
LED, LOW FUEL
SIDE BROOMS
D6
2
J3-5
J4-9
LED, HOPPER TEMP.
HOPPER DOOR OPEN
D7
TPS8
1
2
J4-4
J3-6
LED, DUST CONTROL
HOPPER UP
D8
TPS9
1
J4-7
2
LED, HOPPER NOT DOWN
J3-8
HOPPER DOWN
TPS10
1
COMMON ANODE
HORN
2
J3-7
HOPPER DOOR CLOSE
COMMON GROUND
J3-1
TOUCH PAD DISPLAY
68
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Wiring Diagrams, p/n 56382530, Rev. D, sheet 3 of 3
KUBOTA DIESEL ENGINE SYSTEM
+
RED
BT
-
BLK
RED
BATTERY, 12 Vdc
RED
2
K4
30
RED/GRN
87a
87
RELAY, NEUTRAL
(CLOSED IN NEUTRAL)
2
CB3
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15 AMP
2
GRN/RED
E1
GRN/BLK
1
RED
F
BLU/PINK
GLOW
PLUGS
2
2
E2
E3
X1
F BLU/PINK
30
50
CB1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 70 AMP
1
M2
2
+
E4
STARTER
G1
B
RED
1
S7
SWITCH, IGN.
17
19
30
1
1
PINK
1
X1
B
RED
B
PINK
S
S
F
I/F
L P
L
GRN/RED
P
ALTERNATOR A4
AC
APECS 3000 GOVERNOR
CB5
50
ORN/GRN
1
2
PINK
PINK
A
X1
A
RED
RED
CONNECT TO
MAIN MACHINE
CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 10 AMP
GRA/BLU
GRA/BLU
K
X2
ACTUATOR (-)
K
VIO
VIO
RED
WHT/GRN
GRA
S28
NO GRA/BRN C
NC
RED/YEL
X140
TO MAIN MACHINE
CONTROLLER
GRN/RED
GRN/RED
GRN/YEL
VIO/BLU VIO/BLU
TO GAUGE
GRN/YEL
F
X2
F
D
VIO
GRA
X113
X113
C
POWER TO FUEL PUMP
R7
1
VIO/BLU
BLK
2
SENDER, TEMPERATURE
G
X1
G
S8 o
t
1
GRN/YEL
2
SWITCH, COOLANT TEMP.
K7
WHT/GRN
RED
1
BLK
COIL, RELAY
CB4
K7
2
WHT/VIO
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 A.
30
87a
87
RELAY, ACC
(DIESEL ONLY)
VIO
SPEED SELECT 2
DIODE
GRA/BRN
PINK
MAGNETIC PICKUP (+)
MAGNETIC PICKUP (-)
DIODE
D3
SWITCH, OIL PRESSURE
SPEED SELECT 1
SERVICE TOOL (Tx)
SERVICE TOOL (Rx)
D2
C
B (-)
ACTUATOR (+)
B (+)
BLK
WHT
WHT/BLK
BLU
GRN
YEL
ORN
BLK
69
Service Manual – SW8000
Wiring Diagram, Kubota Gasoline Engine, p/n 56107658, Rev. A.
Electrical System
70
Service Manual – SW8000
Wiring Diagram, Kubota LP Engine, p/n 56107659, Rev. A.
Electrical System
71
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Wiring Harness Diagrams, p/n 56382531 Rev. D
CONFIDENTIAL
THIS DRAWING AND THE DESIGN REPRESENTED HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF NILFISK-ADVANCE, INC.,
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA AND IT HAS BEEN ISSUED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE REPRODUCED NOR COPIED NOR USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS ISSUED AND RECIPIENT
AGREES TO RETURN IT UPON REQUEST.
DWG. NO.
WITH LIGHT OPTION AND
SEAT SWITCH OPTION
B
A
RED/BLK 18-5
B
GRA 18-6
D
CONNECT X17 HERE
S24 SWITCH, TURN SIGNAL
1
1
1
SP13
LP6
2
1 BLK
1
WHT
SP14
LAMP, LEFT FRONT SIGNAL
(OPTIONAL)
BLK 18-11
B
YEL/BLK 18-10
A
X43
LP2
B
2
A
HEAD LIGHT, LEFT
1 VIO 18-4
B
BLK 18-18
1
RED 8-1
C
1
VIO 18-13
1
1
VIO 18-23
1
2
A
X50
A
B
B
RED/BLK 18-1
BLK 18-6
2
H2
HORN
VIO 18-17
S4
SWITCH, HOPPER INTERLOCK
X46 X45
A
A +
GRN/BRN 18-1 B
-
B
BACK UP ALARM
(OPTIONAL)
2
1
X
X185
3
X47
2
X165
1 SP3
X167
RED 18-2 B
F1
E5
FLASHER
(OPTIONAL)
YEL/GRA 18-1
B
ORN/GRA 18-1
A
A
BRN/WHT 18-1
FUSE, 1 A.
BLK 1-1
-
BT1
+
RED 1-1
- -BATTERY, 12 Vdc
1
3
CONNECTOR 1
2
C
A RED 18-1
X10
4
X188
B
2
ENGINE SYSTEM
L
CONNECTOR 2
X1
RED 8-1
X2
RED 1-1
B
BLK 1-1
BLK 6-1
DRIVE PEDAL SENSOR, 5K OHM
5 X82 CHASSIS GROUND
4
1
BLK 6-1
3
6
H1
1
2
R2
B
P
GRN/YEL 16-4
X186 X187 GRN/YEL 16-1
GRN/YEL 16-2
RELAY, SIGNAL LIGHTS
(OPTIONAL)
ORN 16-1
LP10
2
LAMP, TROUBLE
(OPTIONAL)
L9
VALVE S9, HOPPER LOWER
X103
1
22
2 YEL/GRN 18-1
1
A
RELAY, MISTING PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
1 VIO 18-11
L8
VALVE S8, DUST CONTORL BYPASS
X102
1
22
2
BRN 18-1
1
1
1
X69
A
RED 18-2
WHT/YEL 18-1
2
BLK 18-13
L6
VALVE S6, HOPPER UP/BYPASS
X100
1
22
2 BLU/GRA 18-1
NOTE: FOR DIESEL WIRE CB4
AS SHOWN ON SHEET 2
VIO 18-10
L1
VALVE S1, HOPPER DOOR CLOSE/OPEN
X86
1
22
2 BLU/WHT 18-1
87a
87
30
1
PINK 16-3 2
B
PINK 16-4
1 PINK 16-7
X61 X62
A
YEL/BLK 18-1 A
1 SP4
BLK 18-17
B
B
X78
YEL/BLK 18-13
X63 X64
A
A
BLK 18-36
B
S23
1
2
1
BLK/GRN 18-1 A
L4
VALVE S4, DUST CONTROL
X98
1
22
2 BRN/YEL 18-1
NOTE: VIO 18-20 IS USED WITH
MISTING PUMP OPTION
GRN/WHT 18-1 B
1 VIO 18-7
2
CIR. BKR., 20 AMP
SIGNAL LIGHTS
K6
86
85
GRN/RED 18-1 C
1
CIR. BKR., 10 AMP
MISTING PUMP
S
VIO 18-8
CB7
1
WHT/GRN 18-1 D
1
2
87a
30
87
BLU/GRN 14-1
RELAY, SHAKER
BLU/BLK 14-1
GRA/WHT 18-1
K4
PINK 16-2
86
85
PINK 16-3
87a BLU/PINK 16-1
30
87
RELAY, NEUTRAL
RED/GRN 16-1
VIO 18-1
VIO 18-2
K5
BLK 18-10
86
85
BLK 18-25
87a
30
GRN/YEL 16-3
87
P
1
L2
VALVE S2, MAIN BROOM
X96
1
22
2 GRN/GRA 18-1
CB8
1
YEL/RED 18-1
R
-
M
MOTOR ASM, WIPER
INCLUDES 2 SPEED SWITCH
VIO 18-5
B
N
M5
+
RED/GRA 18-1
1
X127
A
B
BLK 18-37
M
L3
VALVE S3, SIDE BROOM
X97
1
22
2 BRN/BLK 18-2
2
X128
GRA/ORN 18-1 A
J
X99
1
SP5
2 2
F
22
BLK 18-22
BLK 16-1
H
1
1 VIO 18-12
1
E
L5
VALVE S5, HOPPER UP/DOWN
85
-
BLK 18-21
VIO 16-4
VIO 18-1
K3
86
LP5
LAMP, RIGHT REAR TAIL/BRAKE
(OPTIONAL)
G
1
CIR. BKR., 20 AMP
ACCESSORY
X204
X169 X166
VIO 14-3
VIO 18-20
WHT
SP18
TAN 18-1
VIO 18-15
CIR. BKR., 10 AMP
IGNITION
CIR. BKR., 20 AMP
SHAKER
30
RELAY, LIGHTS
2
BLK
2 RED
1
B
VIO 18-13
A
1
M
D GRA 18-4
A
B
L7
VALVE S7, HOPPER DOOR
X101
1
22
2 BLK/WHT 18-1
CB4
2
+
D
GRA 18-3
M4
PUMP, MISTING
C
VIO 18-12
CB5
1
SWITCH, LOW LP PRESSURE
A
C
2
YEL/BLK 16-2
YEL/BLK 16-1
GRA/RED 14-1
SP17
C YEL/BLK 18-11 1
2
B
LAMP, RIGHT FRONT SIGNAL
(OPTIONAL)
CB6
1
YEL/WHT 18-1
87a
87
BLK 18-21
SP15
2
1
1
B BLK 18-34
PINK 16-4
VIO 18-11
85
B
YEL/BLK 18-4 C
X76
VIO 16-2
VIO 16-3
VIO 16-3
VIO 16-4
86
2
X71 X73
A
A VIO/YEL 18-6
BLK 18-14
PINK 16-7
VIO 18-10
D
1
VIO/YEL 18-1
E
VIO 18-9
E
WHT/YEL 18-1
STROBE
(OPTIONAL)
-
BLK/RED 16-1 C
WHT
87a
87
2
BLK
X75
M
PUMP, FUEL
PINK/YEL 16-1 D
1 BLK
30
+
BLU/PINK 16-1 F
2
VIO/BRN 18-1
K2
A
S3
J
LP3
SP12
1
RED
85
RELAY, HORN
A
GRA/YEL 18-1
86
2
PINK/YEL 16-1
LP4
LAMP, RIGHT REAR SIGNAL
(OPTIONAL)
SP16
1
2 BLK
WHT
M3
H
VIO 18-9
CB1
1
CIR. BKR., 70 AMP
MAIN
X37 X38
B
B
LP12
VIO 16-1
VIO 16-2
K1
BLK/RED 16-1
GRN/YEL 18-1 G
A
X31
F
2
L
BLK 18-12
1
K
VIO 18-8
D
P
VIO 18-7
B
1
2
1
2
CIR. BKR., 20 AMP
CIR. BKR., 15 AMP
LIGHTS
STARTER
X211
1
2
GRN/YEL 18-4
RED 10-1
RED 14-1
RED 14-2
RED 18-3
RED 14-4
C
A
HEAD LIGHT, RIGHT
SP11
2
1
CB2
VIO 16-1
VIO 16-6
VIO 14-2
VIO 18-5
1
1
SENSOR, GASOLINE
GRA/BLK 18-1
S2
SWITCH, MAIN BROOM
ORN 16-1
VIO 18-4
D
1
2
4
R3
NOTE: BRN/BLK 18-3 IS FROM MISTING PUMP HARNESS
GRA/ORN 18-1
BRN/BLK 18-3
2
2
A BLU/ORN 18-1
B
A
YEL/BLK 18-9
VIO 16-6
E
LP1
X42
CB3
1
A
B
BLK 18-23
X29
F
A
X126
BRN/BLK 18-3
RED 14-2
SP2
1 1
YEL/BLK 18-9
YEL/BLK 18-10
3
2
SENDER, FUEL
GRN/BLU 14-1
BLK 18-18
X125
BRN/BLK 18-1
BRN/BLK 18-2
3
BLK/GRN 18-1
B
PINK 18-1
PINK 16-2
BLK 18-1
BLK 18-2
BLK 18-3
BLK 18-10
TROUBLE LAMP
X52
A
ORN/BLK 18-1
2
2
B
BLK 18-7
GRA/RED 14-1
BLK 18-9
BLK 18-7
BLU 18-1
YEL/BLK 16-2
1
6
YEL/GRA 18-1
ORN/GRA 18-1
BRN/WHT 18-1
GRA/YEL 18-1
GRN/YEL 18-1
A5
4
GRN/RED 18-1
GRN/WHT 18-1
N
5
4
3
BLU/ORN 18-1
BLU 18-1
A
RED 14-1
BLU/GRN 14-2
ORN/GRN 16-1
BLK 14-3
RED 18-3
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X79
WHT/GRN 18-1
D
X209
2
GRN/YEL 18-4
RED/GRN 16-1
A
X83
BLU/BLK 14-1
M
X55
B
MOTOR, SHAKER
(POCKET FILTER)
GRN 18-1
1
GRN/YEL 18-2
BLK 18-4
X54 X53
- B
B
5
J2
WHT/GRA 18-1 8
9
RED/BLK 18-1
10
YEL/VIO 18-1
11
PINK 18-1
ORN/BLK 18-1 12
13
14
BLK 18-3
GRN/YEL 18-2
M8
VIO/YEL 18-3
h
VIO 18-19
VIO 18-3
BLK 18-8
A YEL/BLK 16-5
GRN/YEL 18-3
HOUR METER
2
3
BLU/WHT 18-1
GRN/GRA 18-1
BRN/BLK 18-1
BRN/YEL 18-1
RED/GRA 18-1
BLU/GRA 18-1
BLK/WHT 18-1
BRN 18-1
YEL/GRN 18-1
BLK 18-1
B
B
MOTOR, SHAKER
(PANEL FILTER)
+
LIGHT OPTIONS
C YEL/BLK 18-2
BLK 14-1
A BLU/GRN 14-1
P1
1
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
A
GAUGE, FUEL
3
VIO 18-18
VIO 18-19
GRN/BLK 16-1
M
11
12
13
YEL/RED 18-1 14
GRN/BRN 18-1 15
YEL/WHT 18-1 16
GRA/BLU 18-1 17
GRA/WHT 18-1 18
VIO/BRN 18-1 19
20
BLK 18-2
VIO 18-3
CURB LIGHT
RED 14-4
+
1 3
X109 X110
YEL/BLK 18-11
J1
S
GRA/BLK 18-1.
D
X39 X40
- B
B
I
BLK 18-9.
BLK 18-8.
X59
F YEL/BLK 18-8
E YEL/BLK 18-1 REAR WORK LIGHT
M2
YEL/BLK 16-5
YEL/BLK 16-1
TAN 18-1
WHT/BLK 18-1
BLK 18-22 B
LAMP, CURB
(OPTIONAL)
SWITCH, HOPPER TEMP.
140 DEG. F
(OPTIONAL)
VIO 18-2.
VIO 18-18.
A YEL/BLK 18-8
VIO 18-16 A
B BLK 18-19
GRN/YEL 16-1
X33
A
5
X210
LP11
2
B
LAMP, REAR WORK
(OPTIONAL)
GRA 18-3
GRA 18-2
2 B
P3
GAUGE, COMINATION
(OPTION)
6 REPLACES P1 AND P2
7
6
3
2
SP6
1
2
1
YEL/BLK 18-2
LP9
1
7
1
GRA 18-1
YEL/VIO 18-1
3
P2
(SEAT SWITCH OPTION)
HH
GRN/YEL 18-3
BLK 18-4
BLK 18-6
BLK 16-1
30
87a
87 RED/YEL 18-2
GRA 18-6
RELAY, SEAT
3
2
to
1
85
2
MISTING PUMPBLK 18-37
S6
86
3
6
A2
CONTROL BOX ASSEMBLY
1
SIGNAL LIGHT BLK 18-15
SIGNAL LIGHT BLK 18-14
BLK 14-2
BLK 14-1
S1
SWITCH, IGNITION
ACC
YEL/BLK 16-5.
YEL/BLK 16-1.
2
5
YEL 16-2
YEL 16-1
GRN 18-2
GRN 18-3
VIO/YEL 18-2
VIO/YEL 18-3
IGN
GRN/BLU 14-1
K11
2
1
BLK 18-9
BLK 18-8
S26 SWITCH, MISTING PUMP
YEL 16-3
YEL 16-2
SW SEAT
ST
BAT
APPD
HH
1
VIO 18-23
VIO 18-15
VIO 18-16
VIO 18-17
BLK 18-27
SWITCH, DUST CONTROL FILTER
(OPTIONAL)
X19
4
4
S25 SWITCH, HAZARD
RED/BLK 18-2
GRN/BLK 16-1
RED/BLK 18-3
RED/BLK 18-4
RED/BLK 18-5
BLK 18-39
2
GRA/BLK 18-1
2
REAR WORK LIGHT BLK 18-17
1 WHT/GRA 18-1
S21
X18
1
3
B RED/BLK 18-6
RED 10-1
S5
2
RED/BLK 18-4B
7
S
2
RELAY, .5 SEC DELAY ON BREAK
(SEAT SWITCH OPTION)
X12 X13
A RED/YEL 18-3
RED/YEL 18-1A
2
BLK 18-24
GRN 18-1
GRN 18-2
VIO/YEL 18-1
VIO/YEL 18-2
YEL 16-1
X85
BLK 18-12
BLK 18-13
BLK 18-24
YEL 16-3
BLK/ORN 18-1
1 BLK 18-19
VIO 14-2
.5 SEC
3
31
53S ORN/GRN 16-1
2 SWITCH, BRAKE
(WITHOUT LIGHT OPTION)
(WITH SEAT SWITCH OPTION)
4
BLK 18-38
53M BLK 18-39
S22
B BLK/ORN 18-1
T
1
B
B
K12
15
B
GRA 18-6
PMO
VIO 18-2
VIO 18-18
SP8
2
YEL/BLK 18-4
YEL/BLK 18-3
RED/BLK 18-2
X58
A
VIO 18-20
RED/BLK 18-3
RED/BLK 18-5
BLK 18-11
BLK 18-23
BLK 14-2
BLK 18-38
RED/YEL 18-1
RED/YEL 18-2
X17
A
DFTM
PMO
A-08928
PMO
HH
UPDATE:
RELAY .5 SEC DELAY ON BREAK WAS
RELAY .5 SEC DELAY
A-09080
2-8-13
PMO
HH
UPDATE: SENSOR, GASOLINE WAS SENSOR,
GASOLINE (GM ENGINE)
L
X17
M
B
X66
R
A
GRA 18-9
C
A-08898
GRA/BLU 18-1 K
B
GRA 18-8
ECO
A-08718
A
B
SWITCH, BRAKE
S22
1
2
X57 X58
A
A
REVISIONS
DATE
9-24-12
RELEASE
12-13-12
DEL: TAN/BRN 16-1
12-18-12
1 OF 3
REV
1
1
WHT/BLK 18-1
GRN/YEL 16-2
2 2
SP29
1
GRA 18-1
SHEET
56382531
LP8
LAMP, LEFT REAR SIGNAL
(OPTIONAL)
SP19
2
1 BLK
WHT
R1
1
2
GRN 18-3
X72 X74
A
A GRN 18-4
BLK 18-15
B
YEL/BLK 18-3 C
SENDER, OIL PRESSURE
(OPTIONAL)
GRA 18-2
D
SP7
2
1
1
B BLK 18-35
SP20
C YEL/BLK 18-12 2
1
D GRA 18-5
2
BLK
1 RED
SP21
WHT
LP13
LAMP, LEFT REAR TAIL/BRAKE
(OPTIONAL)
BLK/ORN 18-2
NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS APPLY AFTER
PLATING AND HEAT TREATING,
BUT BEFORE PAINTING.
4. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
EDGES.
Notes: 1. Reference 56382530 Wiring Diagrams
NOTES 1. REFERENCE: 56382530 DIAGRAM-LADDER
FORMS.DSN - E SIZE FORM 1/12/98
DIM. IN [ ] ARE MM.
UNITS IN [ ] ARE ISO METRIC
AS NOTED.
<NOTE>
DRAWN
6-27-11
PMO
NILFISK-ADVANCE, INC.
CHECKED
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA 55447-3408
PROJ ENG
APPROVED
6-27-11
WGL
TITLE
DIAGRAM-WIRING
APPROVED
APPROVED
ORCAD
FIRST USED ON
SW8000
SIZE
CODE
DWG. NO.
56382531
E
SCALE
NONE
ASSY.
56507E11
SHEET
REV.
D
1 OF 3
72
KUBOTA ENGINE SYSTEM
REFERENCE:
56107658 - DIAGRAM-WIRING KUBOTA GAS
56107658 - DIAGRAM-WIRING KUBOTA LP
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
73
Wiring Harness Diagrams, p/n 56382531 Rev. D, sheet 2 of 3
GRN/BLK 16-1
19
INSERT GRN/RED WIRE INTO
POSITION 6 ON CONNECTOR J2 AT
THE CONTROL BOX ASSEMBLY
D2
R7
C
C
VIO
GRA 18-6
D
D
GRA
ACTUATOR (-)
B (-)
MAGNETIC PICKUP (+)
SPEED SELECT 1
MAGNETIC PICKUP (-)
SPEED SELECT 2
SERVICE TOOL (Tx)
WHT
WHT/BLK
BLU
GRN
YEL
ORN
RED 16-1
VIO 18-21
PINK 16-8
A
TAN 18-3
BLK 16-12
B
GRA/BRN 18-3
GRA/BRN 18-2
C
RED/YEL 18-9
D
VIO 18-21
S
R
N
N
P
M
P
L
R
K
M
J
J
L
H
K
G
E
F
D
F
C
E
H
B
D
J
J
A
K
K
B
L
L
C
M
M
E
N
B
A
PINK 16-4
S
C
A
D
E
PINK 16-7
3
GRA/BLU 18-1
1
P
B
4
X10.. 2
BLK/RED 16-1
BLK 1-1
BLK 6-1
X140
X2_
X1_
PINK/YEL 16-1
1
R
X113
N
STARTER
RED 1-1
1
GRA/BRN 18-1
RED 16-3
RED 16-2
RED 16-1
+
E4
RED 8-1
1
VIO 18-22
ACTUATOR (+)
B (+)
M7
2
E3
S
2
E2
P
2
E1
S
2
BLK
2 2
BLU/PINK 16-4
RED/YEL 18-7
B
SERVICE TOOL (Rx)
GRN/YEL 18-3
RED 16-3
C
RED
B
APECS 3000 GOVERNOR
F
B
A
BLK 16-13
2
2
RED 6-1
VIO 16-1
VIO 16-6
VIO 14-2
CONNECT VIO 14-1
TO VIO 16-1, VIO
16-6, AND VIO 14-2
1
RELAY, ACCESSORY
(DIESEL ONLY)
L X142
P
RED 16-2
X154
A
SP26
R
87a
87
C
X158
SWITCH, OIL PRESSURE
GRN/RED 10-1
30
I/F
P L
PINK 16-8
A GRA/BRN 18-1
X150
VIO 14-1
85
VIO 14-1
BLK 18-5
GRN/BLU 14-2
WHT/VIO 14-1
86
RED 12-2
F
S28
2
CIR. BKR., 20 AMP
ACCESSORY
K7
S
ALTERNATOR
NO
NC
2 2
RED 6-1
B
S
BLK 16-12
BLK 16-13
1
1
RED/YEL 18-7
RED/YEL 18-8
RED/YEL 18-9
G2
30
50 BLU/PINK 16-4
X151
CB4.
SP24
1
F
RED 10-1
RED 14-1
RED 14-2
RED 18-3
RED 14-5
RED 14-5
GRN/BLU 14-2
GRN/BLU 14-1
CIR. BKR., 70 AMP
MAIN
SP22
1
2
WHT/VIO 14-1
RED8-1
CB1.
1
TAN 18-3
D3
G
1
SENDER, TEMP.
RED/YEL 18-8
2
GRN/YEL 18-3
GRA/BRN 18-3
2
SWITCH, COOLANT TEMP.
BLK 18-5
GRA/BRN 18-2
S9 o
t
1
1
G
3
2
2
SP23
BLU/PINK 16-1
YEL/GRA 18-1
ORN/GRA 18-1
BRN/WHT 18-1
GRA/YEL 18-1
GRN/YEL 18-1
GRN/RED 18-2
GRN/YEL 18-1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
H
6
5
4
A4
J2.
WHT/GRA 18-1 8
RED/BLK 18-1
9
YEL/VIO 18-1
10
PINK 18-1
11
ORN/BLK 18-1 12
13
BLK 18-3
14
G
50
H
AC
GRN/RED 10-1
GRN/RED 18-2
TAN 18-1
30
GRN/BLU 14-1
ORN/GRN 18-1
X83.
TERMINAL, 6 WAY
KUBOTA DIESEL ENGINE SYSTEM
S7
SWITCH, IGNITION
17
RED 10-1
NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS APPLY AFTER
PLATING AND HEAT TREATING,
BUT BEFORE PAINTING.
4. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
EDGES.
DIM. IN [ ] ARE MM.
UNITS IN [ ] ARE ISO METRIC
AS NOTED.
FORMS.DSN - E SIZE FORM 1/12/98
<NOTE>
DRAWN
6-27-11
PMO
NILFISK-A
CHECKED
PLYMOUTH
PROJ ENG
APPROVED
6-27-11
WGL
TITLE
DIAGRAM
APPROVED
APPROVED
SIZE
ORCAD
FIRST USED ON
SW8000
CODE
E
SCALE
NONE
ASSY.
5
Service Manual – SW8000
Electrical System
Wiring Harness Diagrams, p/n 56382531 Rev. D, sheet 3 of 3
74
CONFIDENT
THIS DRAWING AND THE DESIGN REPRESENTED HEREO
PLYMOUTH, MINNESOTA AND IT HAS BEEN ISSUED WIT
DUCED NOR COPIED NOR USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OT
AGREES TO RETURN IT UPON REQUEST.
DWG. NO.
56507375
SHEET
3 OF 3
REV
D
CAB WIRING
LP12.
1
R9
2 +
1
M
-
CONNECT TO X76 FOR
STROBE LIGHT OPTION
ON TOP OF CAB
2
1
2
SP27
K8
1
X83.
VIO 18-21
2
CONNECT TO X83 ON SHEET 1
1
BLK 18-31
HEATER TEMP.
CONTROL
RED...
VIO/GRA 12-2
5
E1
X195
1
VIO/GRA 12-1
4
3
MOTOR, DEFROSTER FAN
BLK...
RED/VIO 12-1
86
85
30
87a
87
RELAY, HVAC
(OPTIONAL)
X179
GRN/YEL 16-5
GRN/YEL 16-3
CONNECT TO GRN/YEL
WIRE (AT X188) FROM K5
X183
X194
VIO/GRA 12-1
BLK 18-20
1
2
2
3
3
BLK 14-4
1
M6
YEL
RED
ORN
M
-
RED..
WITH A/C SYSTEM:
1. M6 IS NOT USED
2. X170 PLUGS INTO X174
3. X172 PLUSG INTO X175
MOTOR, BLOWER
S35
X175
M9
to
2
-
M
YEL
RED
ORN
YEL
RED
ORN
M10
M
1
2
THERMOSTAT
MOTOR, BLOWER
MOTOR, BLOWER
SWITCH, PRESSURE
86
85
30
87a
87
X105
2
1
1
BLU/BRN 18-1
VALVE, COMPRESSOR
2
1
X207
CONNECT TO L5
M8
BLU
RELAY, CONDENSER FAN
+
M
-
BLK.
MOTOR, CONDENSER FAN
RED/GRA 18-3
2
VIO 18-25
BLK.
RELAY, COMPRESSOR
2
2
87a
87
1
30
VIO 18-24
85
RED/GRA 18-2
BLK 14-7
A
S34
-
BLK 18-31
VIO/GRA 14-1
A
1
86
K9
1
BLU/BRN 18-1
BLK/WHT 18-2
B
B
RED/GRA 18-2
RED/GRA 18-3
GRN 18-5
C
GRN/WHT 18-2
GRN/WHT 18-2
D
RED.
F
C
BLK 16-1
A
A
BLK..
C
B
ORN..
RED..
D
YEL..
A
GRN
B
C
L10
K10
X199
X198
X197
D
ORN 14-2
B
BLK 14-7
1 BLK 18-31
2 SP28
F
RED 14-7
C
GRN 18-5
A
YEL 14-2
WHT 18-1
B
D
BLK/WHT 18-2
C
1
BLK 14-5 2
BLK 16-1
E
A/C SYSTEM
BLK/WHT.
ORN 14-2
WHT
2
GRN.
RED 14-7
3
S33
BLK 18-20
CIR. BKR., 20 AMP
HVAC
GRN/WHT. E
YEL 14-2
2
BLK 14-5 1
1
BLK/WHT
CB9
1
X184
CONNECT TO BLK WIRE (AT X185) FROM K5
X174
1
SWITCH, A/C
WHT 18-1
2
RED/VIO 12-1
X170
X172
RED 12-1
1
BLU..
1
RED/WHT 18-1
ORN 14-1
RED 14-6
YEL 14-1
CONNECT TO X204 ON SHEET 1
YEL..
X203
VIO/GRA 14-1
M7
X178
VIO/GRA 12-3
X182
CONNECT TO TERMINAL 1 ON CB1
SWITCH, FAN
VIO/GRA 12-5
RED 12-1
BLK 18-31
B
BLK 18-30
BLK 18-28
BLK 14-4
VIO 18-22
A
BLK 18-29
BLK 18-28
1
VIO 18-22
BLK 18-29
GRN/YEL 16-4
GRN/YEL 16-3
X189
LP14
21
2
(CAB OPTION)
LAMP, DOME
1
-
M
VIO 18-24
VIO 18-25
VIO/GRA 12-4
L
M
H
C
M5
+
MOTOR ASM, WIPER
INCLUDES 2 SPEED SWITCH
VIO 18-21
S30
B
X190
GRN/YEL 16-4
YEL 14-1
RED 14-6
ORN 14-1
VIO/GRA 12-2
X191
BLK 18-30
BLK
1
RED
GRN/YEL 16-5
STROBE
(OPTIONAL)
X208
CONNECT TO X99 AT L5
UNPLUG X99 FROM L5 (S5 HOPPER
UP/DOWN VALVE) AND CONNECT IT
TO X208. CONNECT X207 TO L5.
ECO
Service Manual – SW8000
75
Engine System, Diesel
Functional Description
Overview
The diesel SW8000 machines use a Kubota V-1505-E3B four-cylinder diesel engine to power the two
hydraulic pumps that run the machine drive wheel motor, main and side brooms, vacuum fan motor, side
broom hydraulic cylinder, hopper lift cylinder, hopper door cylinder and the steering system.
Engine Description
The Kubota V1505 diesel is a four-cylinder, liquid cooled, naturally aspirated engine. A Bosch MD type
mechanical injection pump fitted with an actuator that physically moves the fuel lever inside the pump. The
injection pump controls the fuel quantity to maintain the selected RPM or shut the engine off.
Fuel is stored in a tank under the Operator’s seat. The tank contains a fuel level sending unit. An electric
pump supplies low pressure fuel to the diesel injector pump. There is a replaceable fuel filter cartridge
between the fuel pump and the injector pump. The injector pump has s small “return” line that runs to the
closest injector. The return circuit is carried from injector to injector where it exits the rear injector, and is
connected to a hose that returns back to the fuel tank.
The engine uses glow plugs to aid in starting a cold engine.
The engine RPM is controlled with the Woodward APECS 3000 Electronic Engine Speed Governing System
based on requests from the main machine controller. The main machine controller sends signals to the
Woodward Governing System controller to request one of two engine speeds based on Operator request.
Note: There is a “Dead Man” Lever on
the side of the injector pump that
can be used to shut the injection
pump fuel down to shut off the
engine manually.
Normal Run
Position
(as shown)
Engine
Shutdown
Position
“Dead Man”
Lever
The cooling system consists of a standard radiator and belt driven fan. Note that the fan pushes air away
from the engine and out through the radiator.
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Manufacturers’ Technical Literature
Also refer to the following manufacturer’s technical literature when servicing or repairing the engine:
• Kubota 05 Series Service Data Book 9Y110-00051.pdf
• Workshop Manual, Diesel Engine, 05 Series, WG1605 9Y111-06610.pdf
• Woodward Product Specification 03399, APECS™ 0175 Series Actuators
Engine Starter Circuit
Battery 12 VDC
+
-
2
CB1
Circuit Breaker,
70 Amp
K4
1
30
87a
87
BLU/PINK F
X1
F
BLU/PINK
30
50
RED/GRN
2
M2
1
CB3
Circuit Breaker,
15 Amp
1
30
+
Starter
GRN/BLK
RED
St.
Neutral Relay
(closed in neutral)
A2
Main Machine
Controller
J2-11
J1-18
17
S7
Ignition Switch
J2-1
BRN/WHT
J2-2
ORN/GRA
J2-3
YEL/GRA
B+
B-
Drive Pedal Sensor,
5K Ohm
Starter Circuit Description
For the engine to start:
• The Ignition Switch must provide positive voltage to the contact side of the Neutral Relay, K4, and to the
positive terminal on the Starter.
• The A2 Main Machine Controller must send power to the coil on the Neutral Relay, K4. In order to do this, the
A2 Main Machine Controller must sense that the resistance through the 5K Ohm Drive Pedal Sensor is within
the programmed deadband range.
• The Neutral Relay, K4, must close to provide positive voltage to the Starter.
76
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Engine Protection – Low Oil Pressure Shutdown
Battery 12 VDC
+
-
2
CB1
Circuit Breaker,
70 Amp
RED
1
30
S7
Ignition Switch
B+
APECS 3000
Controller
CB5
Acc.
1
ORN/GRN
2
PINK
A
X1
A
RED
RED B (+)
Circuit Breaker, 10 Amp
Connect to Pin J1-17
on A2 Main
GRA/BLU
Machine Controller
X2
GRA/BLU
K
K
VIO
VIO Speed Select 1
RED
GRA Speed Select 2
D2
C
NO
NC
GRA/BRN
C
RED/YEL
X140
VIO
B (-)
BLK
Actuator (+)
WHT
Actuator (-)
WHT/BLK
Magnetic
Pickup (+)
BLU
Magnetic
Pickup (-)
GRN
DIODE
D3
GRA
DIODE
Oil Pressure
Switch, S28
GRA/BRN
D
X113
X113
C
Power to Fuel Pump
BLK
B-
• The fuel pump electrical power comes from the NO contact of the Oil Pressure Switch, S28. When oil
pressure builds, the Oil Pressure Switch connects C to the NO terminal to provide power to the fuel pump.
• If oil pressure is lost, the Oil Pressure Switch will connect C to the NC terminal. This takes power away
from the fuel pump and gives 12V to both Speed Select 1 and Speed Select 2, which is the “lost oil pressure”
signal to the APECS 3000 Controller. When the APECS 3000 Controller sees this signal, it shuts down the
engine by turning “off” the fuel actuator on the engine.
Engine Speed Control
The APECS 3000 Controller manages the engine RPM through the use of an electronic actuator connected to
the fuel control lever inside the injector pump. The Controller monitors the actual engine RPM via a speed
sensor connected to the Magnetic Pickup (+) and (-) terminals. The speed sensor reads the flywheel ring gear
teeth and the Controller compares the actual engine speed to the desired speed setting. The Controller sends
out a pulse-width-modulated signal to the actuator, which then moves the fuel control lever to regulate the
engine speed. The Controller increases the current it sends through the actuator to increase the engine speed
The actuator is spring-loaded in the “no fuel” default position, and will shut off the fuel to the engine when
there is no electrical current available from the Controller.
When the A2 Main Machine Controller receives an engine speed request from the engine speed switch on the
control panel, it sends either +12V or 0V from pin J1-17 to the Speed Select 1 terminal on the Controller.
The Controller then sends the appropriate current from the Actuator terminals to the actuator to obtain the
desired RPM corresponding to the engine speed requested.
The following table shows the inputs to the Speed Select 1 and 2 terminals and the resulting action.
APECS 300 Controller Inputs
Speed Select 1
Speed Select 2
Engine Condition
0v
0v
Idle
12v
0v
High Speed
0v
12v
(Not Used)
12v
12v
Low Oil Pressure Shutdown
77
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Glow Plug Control
Battery 12 VDC
-
+
2
30
50
CB1
Circuit Breaker,
70 Amp
1
GRN/RED
2
2
RED
E1
2
E3
E4
St.
Starter
19
GRN/RED
S7
Ignition
Switch
GRN/RED
30
B+
2
E2
1
1
1
1
B-
The engine is equipped with glow plugs to assist starting a cold engine. The Battery provides voltage to the
Glow Plugs when the Ignition Switch, S7, is in the engine-run position.
The glow plugs have an internal resistive element that increases in resistance as it heats up. This protects
the glow plug from overheating by reducing the current flow as it gets hot.
Note that you have to hold the key switch in the counterclockwise position to get power to the glow plugs.
When the power to the glow plugs is switched on, the A2 Main Machine Controller will light the glow plug
indicator on the control panel for six seconds.
78
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Component Locations
The following components are included in this section:
•Coolant Temperature Switch
•Alternator
•Oil Pressure Switch
•Starter
•Air Cleaner
•Engine RPM Sensor
•Woodward APECS™ Controller
•Woodward APECS™ Actuator
•Fuel Filter
Coolant
Temperature
Switch
Oil
Pressure
Switch
Alternator
Starter
79
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Air
Cleaner
Engine
RPM
Sensor
Woodward
APECS™
Controller
Woodward
APECS™
Actuator
Fuel
Filter
80
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the parking
brake is engaged, key switch is off and the key is removed from the machine.
Maintenance Schedule
Item
Service Interval
Every
50 hrs.
Check fuel
pipes and
clamps
Every
75 hrs
Every
100
hrs
Every
150
hrs
Every
200
hrs
Every
300
hrs
Every
400
hrs
Every
500
hrs
Every
800
hrs
Every
1500
hrs
Every
Year
Every
Two
Years
X
* Change
engine oil
X
* Change oil
filter cartridge
X
Clean air filter
element
X
Clean fuel filter
element
X
Check fan belt
tension and for
damage
X
Check water
pipes and
clamps
Change fuel
filter cartridge
Clear radiator
interior
X
X
X
Change
radiator coolant
X
** Check
injection nozzle
X
Change air filter
element
Check valve
clearance
X
X
Change water
pipes and
clamps
X
Change fuel
pipes and
clamps
X
* Change the engine oil and filter cartridge after the first 50 hours of operation.
** Maintenance intervals per EPA instructions
81
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Engine Oil
Check the engine oil level when the machine is parked on a level surface and the engine is cool. Change the
engine oil and oil filter after the first 50 hours of operation, then every 200 service hours after that. Use CF,
CF-4 or CG-4 oil meeting API specifications and suited temperatures.
* Important: Refer to the Diesel Lubricating Oil Note below for further diesel oil recommendations.
Refer to the engine manufacturer’s service manuals for oil capacities and additional engine specifications.
Replace the oil filter with every oil change.
Temperature Range
Oil Weight
Above 77 °F (25 °C)
SAE 30 or 10W-30
32 °F to 77 °F (0 °C to 25 °C)
SAE 20 or 10W-30
Below 32 °F (0 °C)
SAE 10W or 10W-30
* Diesel Lubricating Oil Note:
With the emission control now in effect, the CF-4 and CG-4 lubricating oils have been developed for use
with a low-sulfur fuel used in on-road vehicle engines. When an off-road vehicle engine runs on a highsulfur fuel, it is advisable to employ the CF, CD or CE lubricating oil with a high total base number. If the
CF-4 or CG-4 lubricating oil is used with a high-sulfur fuel, change the lubricating oil at shorter intervals.
Low sulfur
(0.5 % ≥)
High sulfur
Remarks
CF
O
O
Refer to Kubota Diesel Engine Workshop Manual
CF-4
O
X
CG-4
O
X
Lubricating
Oil class
Fuel
O = Recommended
X = Not Recommended
Engine Coolant
Checking Engine Coolant
Caution! Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
To check the engine coolant level, open the engine cover and observe the coolant level in the coolant overflow
tank. If the level is low, add a 50/50 mix of water and the recommended type antifreeze. Clean the radiator
and oil cooler exteriors every 150 hours by washing with low-pressure water or using compressed air.
High-pressure water will damage the radiator.
.
82
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Replacing Engine Coolant
One possible cause of engine overheating is trapped air in the cooling system. It’s recommended that you use
a Cooling System Tool when changing the engine coolant. The Cooling System Tool pulls a vacuum on the
cooling system prior to filling to prevent air from being trapped in the cooling system.
Note that there are several types of Cooling System Tools. The following instructions describe how to use a
typical type of tool. Refer to the operating instructions included with your particular tool if different than the
example shown here.
1. Connect a Compressed Air Supply Line
to the fitting on the Cooling System
Tool.
2. Connect the Coolant Supply Line to the
Cooling System Tool. Make sure the
Coolant Valve is closed.
3. Insert and hold the Cooling System
Tool onto the radiator filler neck, then
press the Air Switch. The compressed
air travelling through the Venturi Tube
Assembly will pull a vacuum on the
cooling system to remove air from the
system.
4. Once the vacuum reading on the
Gauge reaches approximately 25 on
the green scale, release the Air Switch.
Note that this also a good opportunity
to check for cooling system leaks,
5. Continue to hold the Cooling System
Tool onto the radiator filler neck and
open the Coolant Valve to allow coolant
to flow into the radiator.
Compressed Air
Supply Line
Gauge
Air
Switch
Coolant
Valve
(closed)
Venturi
Tube
Assembly
Coolant
Supply
Line
Removing the Air from the Cooling System with Cooling System Tool
Gauge
Coolant
Valve
(open)
6. Once the pressure on the Gauge
reaches approximately 5 on the red
scale and the radiator is almost full,
shut off the Coolant Valve and remove
the Cooling System Tool from the
radiator filler neck.
7. Top off the radiator and overflow tank
as necessary.
Filling Cooling System with Coolant
83
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Engine Air Filter Maintenance
Caution! When servicing the engine air filter elements, use extreme care to prevent loose dust
from entering the engine. Dust can severely damage the engine.
The engine air filter contains a primary (outer) and a safety (inner) filter element. The primary element can
be cleaned twice before being replaced.
The inner safety element (blue) should be replaced every third time that the primary filter element is
replaced. Never attempt to clean the inner safety element.
To clean the primary filter element:
1. Unlatch the two Clips at the end of the Air
Filter and remove the End Housing.
2. Pull the primary element out.
End
Housing
Air
Filter
3. Clean the element with compressed air
(maximum pressure 100 psi) or wash it with
water (maximum pressure 40 psi). Do not put
the element back into the canister until it is
completely dry.
4. Reinstall the inner safety element and
primary filter element.
5. Reinstall the End Housing and latch the two
Clips.
Clip (2)
Replacing the Fuel Filter
Warning! Replacing the fuel filter can result in diesel fuel being spilled on the machine and
surrounding areas. This can present a potential fire hazard that can result in serious
personal injury or death.
−− Do not replace the fuel filter on a hot engine as fuel spilled onto a hot exhaust
manifold can catch fire.
−− Replace the fuel filter in a well-ventilated area and observe all applicable safety
precautions.
−− Always wear the recommended personal protective equipment (PPE), including eye
protection.
1. Place a pan or other suitable receptacle underneath the fuel filter to catch any spilled fuel.
84
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
2. Unscrew the Fuel Filter from the Fuel Filter
Housing.
3. Pre-fill the new Fuel Filter with clean diesel
fuel to minimize the amount of air that will
need to be bled out of the fuel system.
4. Screw the new Fuel Filter onto the Fuel Filter
Housing.
5. Bleed the remaining air out of the Fuel Filter.
(Refer to the Bleeding the Fuel System
subsection below.)
Fuel Filter
Housing
Fuel
Filter
Bleeding the Fuel System
The electric fuel pump on the fuel tank pumps fuel to the fuel filter. The fuel flows through the filter to the
injector pump on the engine. The injector pump pumps fuel under high pressure to the injectors.
You’ll need to bleed the fuel system whenever the fuel filter element is removed/replaced, or if the machine
runs out of fuel.
Warning! Bleeding the fuel system can result in diesel fuel being spilled on the machine and
surrounding areas. This can present a potential fire hazard that can result in serious
personal injury or death.
−− Do not bleed the fuel system on a hot engine as fuel spilled onto a hot exhaust
manifold can catch fire.
−− Bleed the fuel system in a well-ventilated area and observe all applicable safety
precautions.
−− Always wear the recommended personal protective equipment (PPE), including eye
protection.
1. Make sure the fuel tank is not empty.
2. Connect switched jumper wires from the battery to the electric fuel pump so you can run the fuel pump
with the ignition switch off.
Service Note: If you’ve removed or replaced the fuel filter element, fill the filter canister with fuel
before you bleed the system. This will minimize the amount of air remaining in the
filter.
3. Turn on the fuel pump.
85
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
4. Slightly loosen the Bleed Screw on top of the
Fuel Filter to remove the air from the fuel line
and Fuel Filter.
5. When no more bubbles can be seen at the Fuel
Filter Bleed Screw and the fuel is running clear,
tighten the Bleed Screw.
Bleed
Screw
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 above as needed to
remove all of the air from the fuel line and
Fuel Filter. Note that you may need to do this
four or five times.
Fuel
Filter
7. Use a wrench to hold the Injector Pump
base stationary, then slightly loosen
the Bleed Screw on top of the Injector
Pump to remove the air from the
Injector Pump fuel line.
8. When no more bubbles can be seen at
the Bleed Screw and the fuel is running
clear, tighten the Bleed Screw.
Injector
Pump
Bleed
Screw
86
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Service Note: Normally steps 9 through 17 below are not required to bleed the fuel system. If you
do need to perform these steps to bleed the fuel system at the injector pump fittings
and injector fittings, make sure to follow the safety warning information below.
Warning! If you need to bleed the fuel system at the injector pump fittings or injector fittings as
outlined in steps 9 through 17 below, make sure to wear protective gloves to protect
your hands from the high-pressure diesel fuel present at these fittings. This highpressure fuel is capable of piercing the skin and injecting diesel fuel into the skin,
which can result in severe personal injury.
9. If necessary, slightly loosen one of the four
Injector Pump Fittings on the top of the injector
pump.
10. Crank the engine to bleed any air from the
Injector Pump Fitting.
Injector
Pump
Fitting (4)
11. When no more bubbles can be seen at the
Injector Pump Fitting and the fuel is running
clear, tighten the Injector Pump Fitting.
12. Repeat steps 9 through 11 above for the other
three Injector Pump Fittings.
Service Note: If you need to bleed the fuel system at the injector fittings as described below, it’s
recommended that you start with the fitting on the shortest line and finish with the
fitting on the longest line.
13. If necessary, slightly loosen one of the four
Injector Fittings.
14. Crank the engine to bleed any air from the
Injector Fitting.
15. When the injection pulses can be seen at the
Injector Fitting and the fuel is running clear,
tighten the Injector Fitting.
16. Repeat steps 13 through 15 above for the
other three Injector Fittings.
17. Make sure the check valve is oriented so that
fuel can only flow from the rear injector to the
fuel tank,
Injector
Fitting
(typical)
87
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Troubleshooting
Note: Also refer to the Workshop Manual, Diesel Engine, 05 Series, WG1605 9Y111-06610.pdf for
additional troubleshooting information and procedures.
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
The engine will not
The drive pedal is not in
crank; the starter does neutral.
not engage.
The battery charge level is
low.
No power to the starter.
The engine cranks but No power to the glow plugs.
will not start.
No output from the APECS
3000 Controller to the
actuator.
Correction
Make sure the drive pedal is in its neutral position.
1.Check the battery voltage and charge as necessary.
2.If the engine still won’t crank, load-test the battery.
Replace the battery if necessary.
• Check circuit breaker CB1 and reset if necessary.
• Check circuit breaker CB3 and reset if necessary.
• Make sure there is continuity through the Neutral
Relay K4 terminals 30 and 87a with the drive pedal
in neutral.
1.Reset the foot pedal deadband position if
necessary. (Refer to the Control System/Main
Machine Controller Programming/Hydrostatic
Neutral Position and Dead-band section.)
2.Check the relay coil resistance. If not 85 ± 5 ohms,
replace the relay.
• Check the wiring to the starter and repair as
necessary.
• Check wiring from the ignition switch to the glow
plugs and repair as necessary.
• Check the ground connection to the glow plugs and
repair as necessary.
• Check wiring to the Controller and repair as
necessary.
• Check the wiring from the actuator terminals on the
Controller to the actuator and repair as necessary.
The APECS 3000 Controller is • Check the APECS 3000 Controller fault codes and
not operating correctly.
take the recommended corrective actions. (Refer
to the APECS 3000 Controller Fault Codes
subsection.)
The engine stops
running, service
indicator light is on.
The coolant temperature is too Refer to the Engine Overheating Problems section
high.
below.
The oil pressure has
dropped below the minimum
acceptable pressure.
Refer to the Loss of Oil Pressure Protection section
below.
Engine will not run at
operating speed.
There is no +12V signal from
pin J1-17 on the A2 Main
Machine Controller to the
Speed Select 1 terminal on
the APECS 3000 Controller.
• Check the wiring from pin J1-17 to the Speed Select
1 terminal on the APECS 3000 Controller (GRA/BLU
wire).
• If this doesn’t correct the problem, there may be
a problem with the A2 Main Machine Controller or
APECS 3000 Controller.
88
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Engine Overheating Problems
When the Coolant Temperature Switch S8 senses that the coolant temperature is too high, it grounds out
the wire to the MIL INPUT J2-5 input on the A2 Main Machine Controller. The A2 Main Machine Controller
then lights the Engine Service Indicator light on the control panel.
Use the checklist below as a guide to thoroughly check the engine cooling system.
• Check the coolant level in the overflow tank and radiator.
• Inspect and clean the radiator and hydraulic oil cooler.
• Check for correct operation of the belt-driven engine cooling fan (slippage).
• Check to see that the engine thermostat opens.
• Check for correct water pump operation.
• Check the engine crankcase oil level.
• Check for air trapped in the cooling system. (Refer to the Engine Coolant/Replacing Engine Coolant
section.)
• Check the coolant temperature switch for correct function as replace if necessary.
Loss of Oil Pressure
Check for possible causes for low oil pressure such as:
• Engine crankcase level is low.
• Incorrect oil viscosity.
• Fault in the oil pressure switch S28.
• Excessive engine wear or defective internal oil pump (relief valve)
APECS 3000 Controller Fault Codes
The Woodward APECS 3000 Controller is capable of identifying some fault conditions and displaying a fault
code. A flashing LED displays the fault conditions. When power is first applied to the Controller, the LED
will flash just once for one second to indicate that the LED is operational. If there is more than one fault, the
LED will flash them all. If there are no faults the LED will flash once every reset, and from then on indicate
the detection of engine speed. The controller will attempt to shut the engine down for all faults and will not
permit starting after reset with fault 1, 5 and 6.
Flash
Code
Fault
Correction
1
APECS unit not calibrated.
Calibrate the unit.
2
Excessive engine speed.
Check parameter settings, wiring, case ground, linkage and
speed sensor.
3
Unusually low engine speed.
Check parameter settings, linkage, load and engine capacity.
4
Protection input shuts down engine.
Check parameter settings and probable cause for fault.
5
Factory settings lost.
Download calibration file and recycle power or consult
factory.
6
APECS unit failed.
Check wiring, shielding, and recycle power. Consult factory.
89
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Compression Test
Note: The photos shown in this section are from a similar three-cylinder diesel.
1. Begin with a fully-charged battery.
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
3. Cover the air inlet opening to prevent foreign objects from falling into the engine.
4. Remove the glow plug Electrical Connector
Nuts and Connector “Rail”.
Electrical
Connector
Nuts
Connector
“Rail”
5. Insulate the Electric Terminal that feeds the
rail to prevent it from shorting to ground.
6. Clean the area around the glow plugs to
prevent any debris from falling into the
engine cylinders when they are removed.
7. Remove the glow plugs.
Electrical
Terminal
90
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
8. To test the compression of one of the cylinders, screw in an appropriate adapter into the glow plug
threads in the cylinder head and attach a suitable compression gauge. Pictured are Snap-On® Diesel
Compression gauge EEPD500 used with compression test adapter fitting TU-15-35 and coupler M3569.
Snap-On®
EEPD500
Snap-On®
TU-15-35
Snap-On®
M3569
9. Disconnect the Injector Pump Actuator
Connector to prevent the engine from starting.
10. Remove any cover over the air inlet but be
very careful not to allow anything to get
“sucked in” during the test.
11. Crank the engine over until the compression
gauge stops climbing. Record the reading. The
cranking compression specifications are shown
in the following table:
Injector Pump
Actuator
Connector
3.14 to 3.53 MPa
Factory
Specification
32.0 to 36.0 kgf/cm2
456 to 512 psi
2.26 MPa
Allowable Limit
23.0 kgf/cm2
327 psi
The allowable difference among cylinders is 10% or less.
12. Repeat for the other cylinders.
13. Reassemble in reverse order.
91
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Specifications
Kubota V-1505 -E3B Diesel
Engine Type
Water cooled, four-cylinder, four-stroke diesel engine
Displacement
91.41 cubic inches [1.498 L]
Bore and Stroke
3.07” x 3.09” [78 mm x 78.4 mm]
Compression Ratio
22:1
Engine Firing Order
1-3-4-2
Rotation
Counterclockwise (as viewed from the flywheel end)
3.14 to 3.53 MPa
Factory Specification
Cranking
Compression
32.0 to 36.0 kgf/cm2
456 to 512 psi
2.26 MPa
Allowable Limit
23.0 kgf/cm2
327 psi
Fuel Injector Pump
Bosch MD Type Mini Pump
Fuel Filter
Cartridge Type
Fuel Pump Pressure
3-5 psi
Fuel Pump Volume Capacity
30 GPM [113.6 LPM]
Fuel Injection Nozzle
Mini Nozzle (DNOPD)
Fuel System
140 kgf/cm2
Injection Pressure
1,991 psi
13.73 MPa
Lubrication System
Cooling System Type
Type
Forced Lubrication by Pump
Engine Oil
API Service Class CF Recommended
Engine Oil Capacity
6.34 US qts.[6 L]
Oil Filter
Full Flow Paper Filter (cartridge type)
Pressurized Radiator, Forced Circulation with Water Pump
92
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Diesel
Kubota V-1505 -E3B Diesel
Resistance – 2.1K ohms near room temperature
Engine RPM Sensor
Output while cranking (unplugged) – 3.6 to 3.9 VAC
Output at idle (connected) – 14.0 VAC
Electrical System
Resistance – 3.3 Ohms near room temperature
Actuator
Starter
Voltage supply from APECS controller when
cranking – approximately 8.0 VDC
160-190 Amps cranking
Special Tools
Cooling System Tool
Diesel Compression Gauge
There are many brands of compression gauges available. Shown
is a Snap-On® EEPD500 Gauge kit
Compression Gauge Fitting for Glow Plug threads
Shown is the Snap-On® TU-15-35; Threads - M8 X 1.0
93
Service Manual – SW8000
Gauge Coupler
If using the Snap-On® diesel compression EEPD500 Gauge kit
and Snap-On® TU-15-35 glow plug thread fitting, a coupler must
be used to join the fitting to the gauge hose. Shown are Snap-On®
couplers M3569 and M3570.
Engine System, Diesel
94
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Functional Description
Overview
The gasoline (petrol) and LPG SW8000 machines use a four-cylinder 1.6L Kubota engine to power the two
hydraulic pumps that run the machine drive wheel, steering system, side and main broom hydraulic motors,
dust control hydraulic motor, and the hopper lift and door cylinders.
Note: Also refer to the following manufacturer’s technical literature:
• Operator’s Manual WG1605 EG523-89162ENG.pdf
• Engine Specifications WG1605 9Y110-01770.pdf
• Workshop Manual WG1605 9Y111-06610.pdf
• Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf
Engine Description
The Kubota WG1605-G-E3 (gasoline) and WG1605-L-E3 (LPG) are four-cylinder, liquid cooled, naturally
aspirated engines.
Kubota 1.6L Gasoline Fuel System Description
This engine uses an electric fuel pump to pump gasoline through the gas filter to the Gasoline Fuel Pressure
Manifold assembly. The Gasoline Fuel Pressure Manifold assembly controls the delivery of gasoline to the
gasoline injector rail assembly. Each cylinder has a fuel rail, mounted with injectors. An Electronic Throttle
Body (ETB) is used to control engine speed.
The Gasoline Fuel Pressure Manifold is equipped with a sensor that sends fuel temperature and pressure
data to the Engine Control Module (ECM). The ECM uses this information to calculate the precise amount
of gasoline to be injected to the engine during operation. This eliminates the need for a separate return line
from the fuel rail assembly.
Kubota 1.6L LPG Fuel System Description
The fuel system on LPG engines includes an LPG Fuel Lock-off device, Dual Stage Regulator (DSR), Direct
Electronic Pressure Regulator (DEPR), Mixer Assembly and Electronic Throttle Body (ETB).
An LPG Fuel Lock-off device, consisting of a 12 volt solenoid and a normally-closed valve, opens during
cranking and engine run cycles. The ECM controls the voltage to the LPG Fuel Lock-off device.
The DSR is a two-stage regulator that is a combination vaporizer, pressure regulating device. The DSR
normally closed when the engine is not running. When the engine is cranking or running, a partial vacuum
is created in the fuel line which connects the regulator to the DEPR and Mixer Assembly. This partial
vacuum opens the second stage regulator, permitting fuel to flow to the DEPR and Mixer Assembly.
95
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
The DEPR controls the fuel flow, and provides the correct air/fuel mixture to maintain performance and
emissions control. The DEPR uses an internal computer, and fuel pressure and temperature sensors to
provide input to the ECM for fuel calculation, fault detection and diagnostics.
The Mixer Assembly is a self-contained air/fuel metering device that utilizes a relatively constant pressure
drop to draw fuel into the mixer from cranking to full load. The Mixer Assembly is mounted in the air
stream, ahead of the ETB.
The ETB uses an electric motor, connected to the throttle shaft, to increase or decrease the angle of the
throttle blade. The ECM sends electrical signals to the motor in the ETB to increase or decrease the airflow
to the engine to control the engine speed.
Note: For a more detailed and thorough description of the Gasoline and LPG fuel systems, refer to
the Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf.
Engine Starter Circuit Description
The starter is prevented from engaging whenever the drive pedal is NOT in the neutral position. A “Neutral
relay” (K4) is in series between the key switch and the starter solenoid. When the relay is at rest (not
energized) current is allowed to flow through the normally-closed contacts (30 to 87a) on to the starter.
The Main Machine Controller monitors the Drive Pedal Sensor to understand the current pedal position.
If it senses that the drive pedal is NOT in the neutral position, it energizes the neutral relay to break the
connection between 30 and 87a. This prevents the starter from engaging.
Crank and Run
Crank
Starter Solenoid
Neutral Relay K4
Drive Pedal
Sensor Input =
Neutral
Main Machine Controller
96
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Crank and Run
Crank
Starter Solenoid
Neutral Relay K4
Drive Pedal
Sensor Input =
NOT Neutral
Main Machine Controller
Engine Protection – Low Oil Pressure Shutdown
The engine controller monitors the oil pressure switch. If it sees a loss of oil pressure, it will shut down the
engine immediately.
Engine Protection – High Temperature
The engine controller monitors the engine coolant temperature. If the temperature reaches 230 deg. F. (110
deg. C.), it will derate the engine power by 30%. If the temperature reaches 240 deg. F. (115 deg. C.), it will
shut down the engine.
Engine Speed Control
The operator can request two engine speeds, “idle” and “full throttle”. The Engine Controller operates an
Electronic Throttle Body to adjust and maintain engine speed according to the requested input of the Main
Machine Controller. To request full throttle, the main machine controller sends out a 12v supply from J1-17
on the GRA/BLU wire to the engine controller. To request idle, the main machine controller does not apply
12v; the output remains low.
97
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Component Locations
LPG And Gasoline Engine Common Electrical Components
The following components are included in this section: (Most photos are of LPG Engine)
• Alternator
• Ignition Coils
• Electronic Throttle Body
• Knock Sensor
• Cam Position Sensor
• Oil Pressure Switch
• Connector 1
• Post Catalyst O2 Sensor
• Connector 2
• Power Relay (Inside Engine Fuse/Relay Box)
• Crank Position Sensor
• Pre Catalyst O2 Sensor
• Diagnostic Connector
• Starter
• Engine Control Module
• Starter Relay (Inside Engine Fuse/Relay Box)
• Engine Coolant Sensor
• TMAP Sensor
• Ground
Figure 1. LPG Engine Shown, Left Side
Engine Control
Module
Electronic
Throttle Body
Knock Sensor
Crank Position
Sensor
Connector 1
and
Connector 2
98
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Alternator
Oil Pressure
Switch
Starter
Oil Filter
Figure 2. LPG Engine Shown - Left Side
Diagnostic
Connector
TMAP
Sensor
Engine Fuse/
Relay Box
Ignition Coils
Figure 3. LPG Engine Shown, Top
99
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Ground
Engine Coolant
Sensor
Figure 4. LPG Engine Shown - Top
Figure 5. LPG Engine Shown - Rear, Under Air
Cleaner
Cam Position
Sensor
Alternator
Pre-Catalyst
O2 Sensor
Post-Catalyst
O2 Sensor
Figure 6. Oxygen Sensors
100
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
LPG ONLY Engine Electrical and Fuel Components
• Fuel Lockoff Solenoid
• DEPR - Direct Electronic Pressure Regulator
• LP Dual Stage Pressure Regulator
• Mixer Assembly
Fuel Lockoff
Solenoid
Direct Electronic
Pressure Regulator
(DEPR)
LP Dual Stage
Pressure Regulator
Mixer Assembly
101
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Gasoline (Petrol) ONLY Engine Electrical and Fuel Components
• Fuel Injectors
• Fuel Pump Relay (Inside Engine Fuse/Relay Box)
• Gasoline Sensor Interface (On top of fuel tank)
• Fuel Pump (On top of fuel tank)
Fuel Pump
Relay
Fuel Injectors
Gasoline
Sensor
Interface
Fuel Tank
102
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is
off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
Maintenance Schedule
Item
Service Interval
Every
8 hrs
(daily).
Check engine oil level
X
Check and replenish coolant
X
Check and clean air filter element
if
necessary
Check LPG tank setting condition
if
necessary
Check LPG fuel connector
Every
50 hrs
(weekly)
Every
100 hrs
Every
1000 hrs
X
* Replace oil filter cartridge
X
Check gasoline fuel hose and
clamp bands
X
Check LPG fuel hose and clamp
bands
X
Clean spark plugs
X
Check fuel filter
X
Check fan belt tension and for
damage
X
Check battery electrolyte level
X
Every
Year
if
necessary
Check LPG tank setting condition
X
Check radiator hoses and clamp
bands
X
Check PCV valve
X
Check coolant hose of LPG
vaporizer
X
Check LPG Lock off valve
X
Check valve clearance
X
Replace spark plugs
Every
2000 hrs
X
* Change engine oil
Replace fuel filter
Every
200 hrs
X
** Replace air cleaner element
X
Replace gasoline fuel hose,
clamp bands and fuel filter
X
Clean inside of fuel tank (gasoline
fuel)
X
Clean water jacket and radiator
interior
X
Every
Two
Years
103
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Item
Service Interval
Every
8 hrs
(daily).
Every
50 hrs
(weekly)
Every
100 hrs
Every
200 hrs
Every
1000 hrs
Every
2000 hrs
Every
Year
Every
Two
Years
Replace intake air line
X
Replace breather hose
X
Replace LPG fuel hose and
clamp bands
X
Replace coolant hose of LPG
vaporizer
X
*** Check LPG vaporizer
X
Replace radiator hoses and
clamp bands
X
Change radiator coolant
X
Replace battery
X
* Change the engine oil and filter cartridge after the first 50 hours of operation.
** Change more often when operating under dusty conditions.
***If you do not have the correct tools and/or are not mechanically proficient, contact your local KUBOTA
dealer.
Engine Oil
Check the engine oil level when the machine is parked on a level surface and the engine is cool. Change
the engine oil after the first 50 hours of operation and every 200 hours after that. Engine oil should have
properties of API classification SL or higher and be suited to the ambient temperature as listed below. Refer
to the engine manufacturer’s service manuals for oil capacities and additional engine specifications. Replace
the oil filter with every oil change.
Temperature Range
Oil Weight
Above 77° F [25° C]
SAE30, SAE10W-30 or SAE15W-40
32° F to 77° F [0° C to 25° C]
SAE20 or SAE 10W-30
-4° F to 32° F [-20° C to 0° C]
SAE10 or SAE 10W-30
Engine Coolant
Checking Engine Coolant
Caution! Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
To check the engine coolant level, open the engine cover and observe the coolant level in the coolant overflow
tank. If the level is low, add a 50/50 mix of water and the recommended type antifreeze. Clean the radiator
and oil cooler exteriors every 150 hours by washing with low-pressure water or using compressed air.
High-pressure water will damage the radiator.
Service Note: The oil cooler tips out for easy cleaning of both the oil cooler and the radiator.
104
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Replacing Engine Coolant
One possible cause of engine overheating is trapped air in the cooling system. It’s recommended that you use
a Cooling System Tool when changing the engine coolant. The Cooling System Tool pulls a vacuum on the
cooling system prior to filling to prevent air from being trapped in the cooling system.
Note that there are several types of Cooling System Tools. The following instructions describe how to use a
typical type of tool. Refer to the operating instructions included with your particular tool if different than the
example shown here.
1. Connect a Compressed Air Supply Line
to the fitting on the Cooling System
Tool.
2. Connect the Coolant Supply Line to the
Cooling System Tool. Make sure the
Coolant Valve is closed.
3. Insert and hold the Cooling System
Tool onto the radiator filler neck, then
press the Air Switch. The compressed
air travelling through the Venturi Tube
Assembly will pull a vacuum on the
cooling system to remove air from the
system.
4. Once the vacuum reading on the
Gauge reaches approximately 25 on
the green scale, release the Air Switch.
Note that this also a good opportunity
to check for cooling system leaks,
5. Continue to hold the Cooling System
Tool onto the radiator filler neck and
open the Coolant Valve to allow coolant
to flow into the radiator.
Compressed Air
Supply Line
Gauge
Air
Switch
Coolant
Valve
(closed)
Venturi
Tube
Assembly
Coolant
Supply
Line
Removing the Air from the Cooling System with Cooling System Tool
Gauge
Coolant
Valve
(open)
6. Once the pressure on the Gauge
reaches approximately 5 on the red
scale and the radiator is almost full,
shut off the Coolant Valve and remove
the Cooling System Tool from the
radiator filler neck.
7. Top off the radiator and overflow tank
as necessary.
Filling Cooling System with Coolant
105
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Engine Air Filter Maintenance
Caution! When servicing the engine air filter elements, use extreme care to prevent loose dust from
entering the engine. Dust can severely damage the engine.
Service the air cleaner more frequently under severe dusty or dirty conditions.
1. Remove the air cleaner elements from the air cleaner assembly and inspect them for foreign material
restrictions or signs of excessive wear or damage. Replace the elements if necessary.
2. Remove all dust and foreign matter from the air cleaner housing.
3. Reinstall the air cleaner elements.
4. Reinstall the air cleaner cup, then securely fasten the retaining clips
Troubleshooting
The EControls engine management package supports robust self diagnostics and is capable of setting scores
of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). DTCs and sensor data can be viewed on a coputer using the “GCP
Display” software along with an “ECom” communication cable. See the Diagnosis Manual ECM System
WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf for the diagnostic tool connection procedure.
The ECom cable can be purchased through Nilfisk-Advance. (See Special Tools in this section for the part
number). It is the same cable that has been used on other recent Nilfisk-Advance machines using the GM
1.6L and GM 3.0L engines. You will need a new version of the GCP software to work with the Kubota
WG1605 engine along with the correlating password. The software, password and installation instructions
can all be downloaded from “Customer Zone”at www.advance-us.com.
Most or all engine troubleshooting is covered in Kubota manuals. There are some things specific to the
SW8000 engine application which are covered here in this manual section such as, engine speed control and
engine starter operation.
Note: Refer to the Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605 9Y110-01760.pdf, for engine
troubleshooting information and procedures including all fault code diagnosis.
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The engine will not
crank.
Weak battery, poor battery
cable connections.
• Check the battery and connections and clean/repair
as necessary.
• Check the wiring from the battery to the Starter B+
terminal on the A3 Engine System and repair as
necessary.
No power to the Starter
Solenoid (Starter Command
circuit)
• Make sure the foot pedal is in the neutral position.
• Reset the foot pedal deadband position if necessary.
(Refer to the Control System, / Main Machine
Controller Programming section.)
• Make sure there is continuity through the Neutral
Relay K4 contacts 30 and 87a (relay off).
• Check the starter relay operation
• Check circuit breaker CB1 and reset if necessary.
• Check circuit breaker CB3 and reset if necessary.
106
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Problem
Cause
Correction
The engine will not
start.
No power to the Ign. Switch
Input terminal on the A3
Engine System.
• Check circuit breaker CB5 and reset if necessary.
• Check the continuity from the Ignition Switch to the
Ign. Switch Input terminal on the A3 Engine System
and repair as necessary.
Engine will not run at
high speed.
Loss of throttle input from
Main Machine Controller to
Engine Controller
Engine System Problem
• Check that a voltage signal is being sent to the
engine controller when the Throttle Switch is set to
operating speed.
• Refer to Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605
9Y110-01760.pdf
The engine stops
running, check engine
light is on.
The coolant temperature is too Refer to the Engine Overheating Problems section
high.
below.
The oil pressure has dropped
too low.
Refer to the Loss of Oil Pressure Protection section
below.
Engine Management System
Problem
Consult Diagnosis Manual ECM System WG1605
9Y110-01760.pdf
Engine Overheating Problems
Use the checklist below as a guide to thoroughly check the engine cooling system.
• Check the coolant level in the overflow tank and radiator.
• Inspect and clean the radiator and hydraulic oil cooler.
• Check for correct operation of the belt-driven engine cooling fan (slippage).
• Check to see that the engine thermostat opens.
• Check for correct water pump operation.
• Check the engine crankcase oil level.
• Check for air trapped in the cooling system. (Refer to the Engine Coolant/Replacing Engine Coolant
section.)
• Check the engine coolant sensor for correct function as replace if necessary.
• Check for combustion gasses in the coolaning system.
107
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Specifications
Model
WG1605-G-E3
WG1605-L-E3
Gasoline fuel
LPG fuel
Number of Cylinders
Four
Vertical, water cooled, four-cycle
Gasoline engine
Type
Bore × Stroke
79.0 × 78.4 mm (3.11 × 3.09 in.)
Total Displacement
1.537 L (93.79 cu.in.)
Cylinder Head
Ignition System
Overhead-Valve
Full Transistor Battery Ignition Type
Governor
Direction of Rotation
Spark Plug Type/Spark Plug Gap
Ignition Timing.
Vertical, water cooled, four-cycle
LPG engine
Electronic Governor
Counterclockwise (Viewed from Flywheel Side)
NGK IFR6F8DN; 0.70 to 0.80 mm (0.028 to 0.031 in.)
0.45 rad (26 °) before T.D.C.
0.35 rad (20 °) before T.D.C.
3000 min-1 (rpm), 3600 min-1 (rpm)
3000 min-1 (rpm), 3600 min-1 (rpm)
0.17 rad (10 °) before T.D.C.
0.17 rad (10 °) before T.D.C.
750 min-1 (rpm), 800 min-1 (rpm)
750 min-1 (rpm), 800 min-1 (rpm)
Firing Order
1-3-4-2
Compression Ratio
9.1: 1
Lubricating System
Forced Lubrication by Trochoid Pump
Oil Pressure Indication
Engine Oil Pressure (Hot)
Electrical Type Switch
Factory Specification
Allowable Limit
49 kPa
At Idle Speed
0.50 kgf/cm2
–
7.1 psi
At Rated Speed
Lubricating Filter
Cooling System Type
Starting System
196 to 441 kPa
147 kPa
2.00 to 4.49 kgf/cm2
1.50 kgf/cm2
28.5 to 63.9 psi
21.3 psi
Full Flow Paper Filter (Cartridge Type)
Pressurized Radiator, Forced Circulation with Water Pump
Electric Starting with Starter
Starting Motor
Battery
12 V, 1.0 kW
12 V, 52 AH or Equivalent
Charging Alternator
Fuel
Lubricating Oil
12 V, 480 W, 720 W
Unleaded Automobile Gasoline
Commercial LPG
Better than SL Class (API) SAE 10W-30
Lubricating Oil Capacity
6.0 L (1.6 U.S.gals)
Catalytic Muffler / Converter
Three-way Catalyst
Weight (Dry)
Kubota Recommended LPG Fuel
Specifications
119 kg (262 lbs)
120 kg (265 lbs)
Commercial Propane gas only,
Equivalent to Propanes H-D-5 of
GPA* standards
108
Service Manual – SW8000
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
Shop Measurements
The following information was gathered by measuring one machine. While the values recorded cannot serve
as “true specifications” they may help you recognize what normal looks like and give you some standard of
comparison.
Engine Vacuum
17.5-18 “HG (59-61kPa)-at warm idle. Measured at approximately 900 ft. elevation
LP Fuel Pressure
• Primary - Approximately 3 psi (20 kPa)
• Secondary - Approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
Ignition Output
while
cranking
WaveStar30:KV
CKP
and
CMP Running Page: 1
Cam Sensor and Crank Sensor Oscilloscope Pattern
109
Service Manual – SW8000
Special Tools
Diagnostic Communication Cable and software, p/n 56305647
Note: The “Ecom” cable is used but the software on the
CD is for the GM engines. New software and
a new password must be downloaded from
Customer Zone to use on the Kubota engine.
Cooling System Tool
Engine System, Gasoline/LPG
110
Service Manual – SW8000
111
Hopper System
Functional Description
Overview
The hopper holds the dust and debris swept up by the brooms. A hydraulic cylinder raises the hopper for
emptying into a dumpster or other receptacle. A second hydraulic cylinder opens and closes the hopper door
to allow the Operator to empty the hopper. The dust control system pulls air from the hopper through the
hopper filter to reduce the dust generated from sweeping. Refer to the Dust Control System section for more
information on the dust control components.
Hopper
The Hopper is supported by the Hopper Lift Arm
Weldment. The Hopper Lift Arm Weldment pivots in
the chassis to allow the Hopper to swing up and
down.
The Hopper Lift Cylinder is attached to the Hopper
Lift Arm Weldment and chassis, and extends and
retracts to raise and lower the Hopper.
The mechanical Prop Rod can be engaged to
prevent the Hopper from being lowered, or from
dropping accidentally if there’s a problem with the
hydraulic system.
Hopper
Hopper
Lift Arm
Weldment
Prop
Rod
Hopper
Lift
Cylinder
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Hopper Door
The Hopper Door is attached to the
Hopper Door Pivot. The Hopper Door Pivot
is mounted to the two Side Broom Arm
Brackets to allow the Hopper Door to open
and close.
The Hopper Door Cylinder is attached
to the Hopper Door and hopper lift arm
weldment, and extends and retracts to
open and close the Hopper Door.
Side Broom
Arm Bracket (2)
Hopper
Door
Hopper Door
Cylinder
Hopper
Door Pivot
112
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Hopper Hydraulic System
The hydraulic solenoid valves
that control the Hopper Lift
Cylinder and Hopper Door
Cylinder are in the Hydraulic
Manifold Assembly, The
solenoid valves are electrically
energized by pressing the
corresponding switches on the
control panel.
S5 Hopper
Up/Down
S4 Only
Installed on
Models with
Litter Vac Kit
S7 Hopper
Open
S9 Hopper
Lower
The hopper lift cylinder is
connected to ports M and
N on the Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly.
Hydraulic
Manifold
Assembly
The S5 Hopper Up/Down, S6
Hopper Up Bypass and the S9
Hopper Lower solenoid valves
control the hopper lift cylinder.
S1 Hopper
Close/
Open
The hopper door cylinder
is connected to ports B and
C on the Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly.
The S1 Hopper Close/Open
and S7 Hopper Open solenoid
valves control the hopper door
cylinder.
S6 Hopper
“M” To Upper
Up Bypass
“B”
To
Lower
Port on
Port on
Hopper Lift
Hopper
Door
Cylinder
Cylinder
Note that:
• The S4 solenoid valve is
only installed on machines
equipped with the Litter
Vac Kit.
“N” To Lower
Port on
Hopper Lift
Cylinder
“C” To Upper
Port on
Hopper Door
Cylinder
Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly
• On machines without the
Litter Vac Kit, a captive
plug is installed in the S4
location in the Hydraulic
Manifold Assembly.
C
Hopper
Door
Cylinder
B
M
N
Hopper Lift
Cylinder
113
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Hopper System Wiring Diagram
Battery 12 VDC
+
-
2
CB1
Circuit Breaker, 70 Amp
St.
Ignition
Switch
Ign.
Acc.
CB4
Circuit Breaker, 20 Amp
GRN/BLU
1
2 VIO
VIO
Bat.
S1
GRN/BLU
RED
1
A2 Main Machine
Controller
L1
VIO
1
BLU/WHT
2
J1-1
Bat -
RED/GRA
J1-5
Bat -
BLU/GRA
J1-6
Bat -
Valve S1
Hopper Close/Open
L5
VIO
1
2
Valve S5
Hopper Up/Down
(Closed when
Hopper is Down)
L6
VIO
1
2
5v
Valve S6
Hopper Up/Bypass
1
2
BLK/WHT
J1-7
Bat -
YEL/GRN
J1-9
Bat -
Valve S7
Hopper Open
L9
VIO
1
2
Valve S9
Hopper Lower
Touch Pad Switches
TPS7
1
2
J3-5
5v
Hopper Door Open
TPS8
1
2
J3-6
5v
Hopper Up
TPS9
1
2
J3-8
5v
Hopper Down
1
RED/BLK
1 S4 2
Hopper
Interlock
Switch
L7
VIO
J2-9
TPS10
2
J3-7
5v
Hopper Door Close
Common Ground
J3-1
BLK
114
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Hopper System Circuit Description
Positive voltage is provided to hopper solenoid valves S1, S5, S6, S7 and S9 when the Ignition Switch is on. The
A2 Main Machine Controller will ground and energize the solenoid valve corresponding to the function selected
by the Operator via the Touch Pad Switches.
• The Hopper Interlock Switch, S4, must be closed (hopper down) before the sweeping functions can be
enabled.
• The Hopper Interlock Switch, S4, must be open (hopper up) before the hopper door can be opened or closed
manually.
Note:The A2 Main Machine Controller programming logic for the hopper functions works as follows:
• The engine needs to be at the high-speed setting in order to raise or lower the hopper.
• The A2 Main Machine Controller will automatically open the hopper door when the main
broom is on (lowered).
• The A2 Main Machine Controller will automatically close the hopper door when the main
broom is off (raised) or when the hopper is not down.
• The hopper door cannot be closed manually when the main broom is on and the hopper is
down.
• The hopper must not be down and the main broom must be off in order for the hopper
door to be opened or closed manually.
• The main broom is turned off automatically and the hopper door is closed automatically
when the hopper is raised (not down).
115
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Hopper System Hydraulic Diagrams
Hopper Down, Hopper Door Closed
Hopper Dump Cylinder
B
C
S1
From
Steering
To
Steering
Hopper
Close/Open
S7
Hopper
Open
Main
S2
2.0
GPM
Hopper
8.6
GPM
S6
Hopper
Lower
S5
2500
PSI
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
T
Captive
Plug
From Dust
Control
S9
Hopper
Up/Down
N
M
P
Hopper Lift Cylinder
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
When the hopper is down and the main broom is off, the hydraulic oil from the Gear Pump passes through the
8.6 GPM splitter, through the de-energized Hopper Up Bypass solenoid valve, S6, then through the return lines
to the Oil Cooler and Filter.
When the hopper door is closed, the hydraulic oil from the Gear Pump passes through the de-energized
Hopper Open solenoid valve, S7, then to the retract (lower) port, B, on the extended Hopper Dump Cylinder. The
check valve on the de-energized Hopper Close/Open solenoid valve, S1, blocks the oil flow through the Hopper
Dump Cylinder to keep the Hopper Dump Cylinder extended and the hopper door closed.
116
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Raise Hopper
From
Steering
To
Steering
Main
S2 Broom
2.0
GPM
Hopper
Up Bypass
8.6
GPM
S6
Hopper
Lower
S5
2500
PSI
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
T
Captive
Plug
From Dust
Control
S9
Hopper
Up/Down
N
M
P
Hopper Lift Cylinder
Raises Hopper
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
• When the Raise Hopper Switch on the control panel is pressed, the A2 Main Machine Controller energizes
the Hopper Up/Down solenoid valve, S5, and the Hopper Up Bypass solenoid valve, S6.
• The check valve in the energized Hopper Up Bypass solenoid valve blocks and directs the hydraulic oil to
the energized Hopper Up/Down solenoid valve, S5. The hydraulic oil also “deadheads” at the check valve in
the de-energized Main Broom solenoid valve, S2, at the de-energized Hopper Lower solenoid valve, S9, and
at the Captive Plug in the pressure line.
• The hydraulic oil goes through the energized Hopper Up/Down solenoid valve, S5, then to the extend
(lower) port, N, on the Hopper Lift Cylinder to raise the hopper.
• The oil from the retract (upper) port, M, on the Hopper Lift Cylinder goes to the return line to the Oil Cooler
and Filter.
117
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Lower Hopper
To
Steering
From
Steering
Main
S2 Broom
2.0
GPM
Hopper Up
Bypass
8.6
GPM
Captive
Plug
S6
S5
2500
PSI
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
T
From Dust
Control
S9
Hopper
Hopper
N
M
P
Hopper Lift Cylinder
Lowers Hopper
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
• When the Lower Hopper Switch on the control panel is pressed, the A2 Main Machine Controller
energizes the Hopper Lower solenoid valve, S9.
• The hydraulic oil is directed through the de-energized Hopper Up Bypass solenoid valve, S6, then to
the retract (upper) port, M, on the Hopper Lift Cylinder to lower the hopper. The check valves in the deenergized Hopper Up/Down solenoid valve, S5, block the oil to and from the extend (lower) port, N, on the
Hopper Lift Cylinder. The hydraulic oil also “deadheads” at the check valve in the de-energized Main Broom
solenoid valve, S2, and at the Captive Plug in the pressure line.
• The oil from the extend (lower) port, N, on the Hopper Lift Cylinder goes through the energized Hopper
Lower solenoid valve, S9, then returns to the Reservoir.
118
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Open Hopper Door
Hopper Dump
Cylinder Opens
Hopper Door
B
To
Steering
From
Steering
C
S1
Hopper
Close/Open
S7 Hopper
Open
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
T
P
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
Note: The hopper door can only be opened and closed manually when the hopper is not down.
The hopper door opens automatically when the hopper is down and the main broom is on.
• When the Open Dump Door Switch on the control panel is pressed, the A2 Main Machine Controller
energizes the Hopper Close/Open solenoid valve, S1.
• The hydraulic oil goes through the de-energized Hopper Open solenoid valve, S7, then to the retract (lower)
port, B, on the Hopper Dump Cylinder to open the hopper door.
• The oil from the extend (upper) port, C, on the Hopper Dump Cylinder goes through the energized Hopper
Close/Open solenoid valve, S1, through the de-energized Hopper Open solenoid valve, S7, then returns to
the Reservoir.
119
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Close Hopper Door
Hopper Dump
Cylinder Closes
Hopper Door
B
To
Steering
From
Steering
C
S1
Hopper
Close/Open
S7
Open
n
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
T
P
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
Note: The hopper door can only be opened and closed manually when the hopper is not down.
The hopper door closes automatically when the broom is off or the hopper is raised.
• When the Close Dump Door Switch on the control panel is pressed, the A2 Main Machine Controller
energizes the Hopper Open solenoid valve, S7.
• The hydraulic oil is directed through the energized Hopper Open solenoid valve, S7, through the check
valve in the de-energized Hopper Close/Open solenoid valve, S1, then to the extend (upper) port, C, on the
Hopper Dump Cylinder to close the hopper door.
• The oil from the retract (lower) port, B, on the Hopper Dump Cylinder goes through the energized Hopper
Open solenoid valve, S7, then returns to the Reservoir.
120
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Component Locations
The following components are included in this section:
• Hopper
• Hopper Interlock Switch
• Hopper Lift Cylinder
• Hopper Prop Rod
• Hopper Door Cylinder
• Hydraulic Manifold Assembly and Solenoid Valves
Hopper
The Hopper is on the front of the machine
and holds the dust and debris swept up by
the brooms. The hopper also houses the dust
control system components (panel filter, panel
filter shaker assembly, vacuum fan assembly,
etc.). Refer to the Dust Control System section
for details on the Dust Control System.
Hopper
Cover
The Hopper Cover lifts up to allow access to the
dust control system components.
Hopper
Hopper Interlock Switch
The Hopper Interlock Switch (S4) is
a proximity switch that “closes”
when the hopper is fully down.
The switch is mounted on the left
side of the machine above the left
front wheel. This switch must be
closed in order for the sweeping
functions to be enabled.
Hopper
Interlock
Switch
121
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Hopper Lift Cylinder
The Hopper Lift Cylinder is attached to the machine frame
and hopper, and raises and lowers the hopper.
Hopper Prop Rod
The Prop Rod must be engaged whenever personnel are
working on or underneath the hopper. The Prop Rod
prevents the hopper from being lowered, or from dropping
down accidentally if there’s a failure in the hydraulic
system.
Hopper
Lift
Cylinder
Prop
Rod
Warning! Never work under the hopper without
first engaging the Prop Rod.
To engage the Prop Rod:
1. Raise the hopper to its full-up
position.
2. Pull the Hopper Safety Support
Handle toward the rear of the
machine to retract the Prop
Rod to the engage position (as
shown in the adjacent photo).
3. Lower the hopper to engage
the Prop Rod.
t
rac
Ret Rod
p
Pro
end
Ext Rod
p
Pro
To disengage the Prop Rod.
1. Raise the hopper to its full-up
position.
2. Push the Hopper Safety Support
Handle toward the front of the
machine to extend the Prop
Rod to the disengage position.
3. Lower the hopper.
Hopper Safety
Support Handle
122
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Hopper Door Cylinder
The Hopper Door Cylinder is
attached to the Hopper Door
and Hopper Lift Arm Weldment,
and retracts and extends to
open and close the Hopper
Door.
Hopper
Door
Hopper
Door
Cylinder
Hopper
Lift Arm
Weldment
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly and Solenoid Valves
The Hydraulic Manifold Assembly is
mounted on the frame underneath the
center cover assembly/DustGuard™ tank.
• The S5 Hopper Up/Down, S7 Hopper
Open and S9 Hopper Lower solenoid
valves are mounted on the top of the
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly.
S4 Only
Installed on
Models with
Litter Vac Kit
S5 Hopper
Up/Down S7 Hopper
Open
S9 Hopper
Lower
• The S6 Hopper Up Bypass and S1 Hopper
Close/Open solenoid valves are mounted
on the bottom of the Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly.
Hydraulic
Manifold
Assembly
S1 Hopper
Close/Open
S6 Hopper
Up Bypass
S7 Hopper
Open
S9 Hopper
Lower
S5 Hopper
Up/Down
S6 Hopper
Up Bypass
S1 Hopper
Close/Open
123
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The hopper doesn’t
rise when the Raise
Hopper Switch is
pressed.
The engine is at idle speed.
Switch the engine to high speed.
The Raise Hopper Switch
is not making connection
with the A2 Main Machine
Controller.
Check the connection between the touch pad switch
panel and pin J3-6 on the A2 Main Machine Controller.
If the connection is OK, there may be a problem with
the touch pad switch panel or the A2 Main Machine
Controller.
There is no power to the S5
Hopper Up/Down solenoid
valve.
Check the wiring to the S5 Hopper Up/Down solenoid
valve. The solenoid receives positive battery voltage
and is grounded to the A2 Main Machine Controller
when the Raise Hopper Switch is pressed. Repair/
replace the wiring as necessary.
The S5 Hopper Up/Down
solenoid valve is not
operating.
• Check the solenoid coil resistance. If the resistance
doesn’t measure approximately 9 ohms ±10%,
replace the coil.
• Check the function of the solenoid valve cartridge.
Replace as necessary.
There is no power to the S6
Hopper Up Bypass solenoid
valve.
Check the wiring to the S6 Hopper Up Bypass solenoid
valve. The solenoid receives positive battery voltage
and is grounded to the A2 Main Machine Controller
when the Raise Hopper Switch is pressed. Repair/
replace the wiring as necessary.
The S6 Hopper Up Bypass
solenoid valve is not
operating.
• Check the solenoid coil resistance. If the resistance
doesn’t measure approximately 9 ohms ±10%,
replace the coil.
• Check the function of the solenoid valve cartridge.
Replace as necessary.
The S9 Hopper Lower
solenoid valve is stuck open.
The S2 Main Broom solenoid
valve is stuck open.
The hopper mount or hopper
lift cylinder is binding.
Check the function of the solenoid valve cartridge.
Replace as necessary.
Check for any mechanical binding or damage to the
hopper pivot points, hopper lift cylinder and cylinder
mounting points. Correct as necessary.
124
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Problem
Cause
Correction
The hopper doesn’t
lower when the Lower
Hopper Switch is
pressed.
The engine is at idle speed.
Switch the engine to high speed.
The Lower Hopper Switch
is not making connection
with the A2 Main Machine
Controller.
Check the connection between the touch pad switch
panel and pin J3-8 on the A2 Main Machine Controller.
If the connection is OK, there may be a problem with
the touch pad switch panel or the A2 Main Machine
Controller.
There is no power to the S9
Hopper Lower solenoid valve.
Check the wiring to the S9 Hopper Lower solenoid
valve. The solenoid receives positive battery voltage
and is grounded to the A2 Main Machine Controller
when the Lower Hopper Switch is pressed. Repair/
replace the wiring as necessary.
The S9 Hopper Lower
solenoid valve is not
operating.
• Check the solenoid coil resistance. If the resistance
doesn’t measure approximately 9 ohms ±10%,
replace the coil.
• Check the function of the solenoid valve cartridge.
Replace as necessary.
The S2 Main Broom solenoid
valve is stuck open.
The S6 Hopper Up Bypass
solenoid valve is stuck closed.
Check the function of the solenoid valve cartridge.
Replace as necessary.
The S5 Hopper Up/Down
solenoid valve is stuck open.
The hopper door
doesn’t open when
the Open Dump Door
Switch is pressed.
The Open Dump Door Switch
is not making connection
with the A2 Main Machine
Controller.
Check the connection between the touch pad switch
panel and pin J3-5 on the A2 Main Machine Controller.
If the connection is OK, there may be a problem with
the touch pad switch panel or the A2 Main Machine
Controller.
There is no power to the S7
Hopper Open solenoid valve.
Check the wiring to the S7 Hopper Open solenoid
valve. The solenoid receives positive battery voltage
and is grounded to the A2 Main Machine Controller
when the Lower Hopper Switch is pressed. Repair/
replace the wiring as necessary.
The S7 Hopper Open solenoid • Check the solenoid coil resistance. If the resistance
valve is not operating.
doesn’t measure approximately 9 ohms ±10%,
replace the coil.
• Check the function of the solenoid valve cartridge.
Replace as necessary.
There is binding in the hopper
door mount or hopper door
cylinder.
Check for any mechanical binding or damage to the
hopper door pivot points, hopper door cylinder and
cylinder mounting points. Correct as necessary.
125
Service Manual – SW8000
Hopper System
Problem
Cause
Correction
The hopper door
doesn’t close when
the Close Dump Door
Switch is pressed.
The Close Dump Door Switch
is not making connection
with the A2 Main Machine
Controller.
Check the connection between the touch pad switch
panel and pin J3-7 on the A2 Main Machine Controller.
If the connection is OK, there may be a problem with
the touch pad switch panel or the A2 Main Machine
Controller.
There is no power to the S1
Hopper Close/Open solenoid
valve.
Check the wiring to the S1 Hopper Close/Open
solenoid valve. The solenoid receives positive battery
voltage and is grounded to the A2 Main Machine
Controller when the Lower Hopper Switch is pressed.
Repair/replace the wiring as necessary.
The S1 Hopper Close/
Open solenoid valve is not
operating.
• Check the solenoid coil resistance. If the resistance
doesn’t measure approximately 9 ohms ±10%,
replace the coil.
• Check the function of the solenoid valve cartridge.
Replace as necessary.
The S7 Hopper Open solenoid Check the function of the solenoid valve cartridge.
valve is stuck in the energized Replace as necessary.
position.
There is dirt or debris
preventing the hopper door
from closing.
• Clean/remove any dirt or debris from the hopper
door and door sealing surfaces.
There is binding in the hopper
door mount or hopper door
cylinder.
Check for any mechanical binding or damage to the
hopper door pivot points, hopper door cylinder and
cylinder mounting points. Correct as necessary.
Specifications
Component
Specifications
S1, S5, S6, S7 and S9
Solenoid Valves
Nominal Coil Resistance – 8 Ohms
Bore Diameter – 2.5 in.
Hopper Lift Cylinder
Rod Diameter – 1.25 in.
Bore Diameter – 1.5 in.
Hopper Door Cylinder
Rod Diameter – .75 in.
126
Service Manual – SW8000
127
Hydraulic System
Functional Description
Overview
The hydraulic Piston Pump powers the traction Drive Motor. The hydraulic Gear Pump powers the Main Broom
Motor, Side Broom Motor(s) and the Dust Control Vacuum Fan Motor. The Gear Pump also powers the Hopper Lift,
Hopper Door and Side Broom Cylinders, and the Steering Control Unit and Steering Cylinder.
The Piston Pump and traction Drive Motor are a “closed” system. Electrically-controlled solenoid valves,
located in the Hydraulic Manifold Assembly, direct the hydraulic oil from the Gear Pump to the various system
components to perform the sweeping and dust control functions, raise and lower the hopper, and open and
close the hopper door. The hydraulic oil from the machine system components returns through the Oil Cooler
and Oil Filter to the Reservoir.
Note: The individual hydraulic motors and cylinders are described in the corresponding machine
system sections.
Hopper Door
Cylinder
Dust
Control
Motor
Steering
Control Unit
Hydraulic
Manifold
Assembly
Oil
Cooler
Side
Broom
Cylinder
Main Broom Motor
Side Broom
Motor
Oil Filter
Hopper Lift
Cylinder
Gear/Piston
Pump Assembly
Reservoir
Steering
Cylinder
Drive Motor
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Pumps
The engine drives the two
hydraulic pumps that
power the drive wheel
and the various system
components:
Case Drain
to Reservoir
To “P” Port
on Hydraulic
Manifold
Assembly
Charge Circuit
from Filter
To “B”
Port on
Drive Motor
The Piston Pump (2.48 CIR)
is a variable-displacement
axial piston pump that
powers the drive motor.
Test
Port
The Gear Pump (1.02 CIR)
powers the main and
side broom motors, dust
control vacuum fan motor,
hopper lift cylinder, hopper
door cylinder, side broom
cylinder, steering control
unit and steering cylinder,
Piston
Pump
To “A” Port on
Drive Motor
The Test Port is located on
the pressure side of the
Gear Pump to allow you to
measure the pressure from
the Gear Pump.
Gear
Pump
Supply from
Reservoir
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly
The Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly contains the
hydraulic solenoid valves
that control the oil flow
to the main broom motor,
side broom motor(s), dust
control motor, hopper
lift cylinder, hopper door
cylinder, side broom lift
cylinder and steering
control unit.
To Side
Broom Lift
Cylinder
To Dust
Control Motor
Hydraulic
Manifold
Assembly
From Steering
Control Unit
To Hopper
Lift Cylinder
Return to
Reservoir
To Side Broom
Motor and Lift
Cylinder
From Side
Broom Motor
From Gear
Pump
From Main
Broom Motor
Return to Filter,
Cooler and
Reservoir
From Dust
Control Motor
To Hopper
Door Cylinder
To Steering
Control Unit
To Main
Broom Motor
To Hopper
Lift Cylinder
To Hopper
Door Cylinder
128
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Electrical Schematic
Battery 12 VDC
-
+
2
CB1
Circuit Breaker, 70 Amp
A2 Main Machine
Controller
Bat.
S1
St.
J2-1
Ignition
Switch
Ign.
J2-2
VIO
RED
1
L1
GRN/BLU
VIO
Acc.
CB4
Circuit Breaker, 20 Amp
GRN/BLU 1
VIO
2
1
2
BLU/WHT
J1-1
J2-3
BRN/WHT
ORN/GRA
Bat -
L2
1
2
GRN/GRA J1-2
R2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor,
5K Ohm
Valve S1
Hopper Close/Open
VIO
2
1
YEL/GRA
J2-12
5v
1 S2 2
ORN/BLK
BLK
Bat Main Broom Switch
(Open when
Broom is Down)
Valve S2
Main Broom
L3
VIO
1
2
BRN/BLK
J1-3
Bat -
J2-9
5v
Valve S3
Side Broom
1
2
RED/GRA
J1-5
Bat -
Valve S5
Hopper Up/Down
Touch Pad Switches
L6
VIO
1
BLK
Hopper Interlock Switch
(Closed when
Hopper is Down)
L5
VIO
1 S4 2
RED/BLK
2
BLU/GRA
J1-6
TPS5
J3-10
Bat 5v
Valve S6
Hopper Up/Bypass
1
2
Dust Control
TPS6
J3-9
L7
VIO
1
2
BLK/WHT
J1-7
Bat -
5v
1
Valve S7
Hopper Open
TPS7
J3-5
5v
L8
VIO
1
2
Side Brooms
1
2
Hopper Door Open
BRN
2
J1-8
Bat TPS8
Valve S8
Dust Control Bypass
J3-6
5v
1
2
Hopper Up
L9
VIO
1
2
YEL/GRN
J1-9
TPS9
Bat -
Valve S9
Hopper Lower
J3-8
5v
1
2
Hopper Down
J3-7
5v
1
TPS10
2
Hopper Door Close
J3-1
Common Ground
Electrical Circuit Description
The Touch Pad Switches on the control panel enable the solenoid Valves corresponding to the selected
functions.
The A2 Main Machine Controller will actuate the appropriate solenoid Valves to run the main broom, side
broom and dust control motors, and extend the side broom cylinder when the following conditions are met:
• The main broom is lowered and the Main Broom Switch S2 is open.
• The hopper is down and the Hopper Interlock Switch S4 is closed.
• The drive pedal is moved from neutral, changing the resistance through the 5K Ohm Drive Pedal Sensor
from its “deadband” range.
129
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Component Locations
The following components are included in this section:
• Hydraulic Piston and Gear Pumps
• Hydraulic Manifold Assembly
• Hydraulic Oil Reservoir
• Oil Filter
• Oil Cooler
Hydraulic Piston and Gear Pumps
The hydraulic Piston Pump and
Gear Pump are mounted on the
rear of the engine (toward the
front of the machine) and are
driven by the engine crankshaft.
Piston
Pump
Gear
Pump
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly
The Hydraulic Manifold Assembly is
mounted on the frame underneath
the center cover assembly/
DustGuard™ tank (removed in the
adjacent photo).
Hydraulic
Manifold
Assembly
130
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Oil Reservoir
The Hydraulic Oil Reservoir is located below
the Operator seat. The hydraulic oil in
the Hydraulic Oil Reservoir is at the correct
level when it is halfway up the filter
screen inside the reservoir filler neck as
viewed when the Filler Cap is removed.
Filler Cap
Hydraulic Oil
Reservoir
Oil Filter
The Oil Filter is mounted to the machine
frame and filters the oil returning to the
reservoir.
Oil
Filter
131
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Oil Cooler
The Oil Cooler is mounted to the rear of
the engine Radiator.
Radiator
Oil
Cooler
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is
off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
To Check the Hydraulic Oil Level
Remove the filler cap from the reservoir and check the
hydraulic oil level in the reservoir. The hydraulic oil level
should be halfway up the Filter Screen inside the reservoir
filler neck. Add 10w-30 oil as needed.
Note: Change and flush the oil if major
contamination from a mechanical failure
occurs.
Filter Screen
132
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
To Change the Hydraulic Oil Filter
Caution! Make sure the hydraulic system is not under pressure, and that the hydraulic filter
and reservoir are cool to the touch before servicing the filter.
Make sure you are wearing the appropriate clothing and eye protection when working
with or near the hydraulic system.
1. It’s recommended that you lay down
some rags or paper towels underneath
the Oil Filter to catch any oil that may
spill.
2. Spin the Oil Filter Cartridge off of the Oil
Filter Head.
3. Install the new Oil Filter Cartridge onto
the Oil Filter Head.
Oil Filter
Head
Oil Filter
Cartridge
To Clean the Hydraulic Oil Cooler
Clean the engine radiator and hydraulic oil cooler every 30 hours of operation as follows:
Caution! Wear Safety glasses when cleaning the engine radiator and hydraulic oil cooler.
1. Tip the Engine Cover back, then
disconnect the cable latch on the left
side of Engine Cover to allow the Cover
to tip all the way back and out of the
way.
Hydraulic
Oil Cooler
2. Turn the locking mechanism at the
top of the Hydraulic Oil Cooler to allow
the Cooler to tip back away from the
Radiator for easy access.
Radiator
3. Blow out the Radiator and Hydraulic Oil
Cooler with compressed air, or clean
using low-pressure water to rinse any
debris from the fins.
Engine
Cover
133
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Caution! Do not use a pressure washer or a mechanical brush to clean fins since this can
damage the fins. If the fins get bent, carefully straighten them to improve cooling
performance.
4. Lift the Hydraulic Oil Cooler to its upright position and latch it into place.
5. Lift the Engine Cover up and reconnect the cable latch.
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
General poor
hydraulic
performance.
Low oil hydraulic level.
Check the oil level in the reservoir and
add oil as necessary.
Hydraulic oil temperature too high.
• Check for any restrictions to or
from the oil cooler and correct as
necessary.
• Clean the cooling fins on the oil
cooler to ensure adequate airflow
through the cooler.
Hydraulic oil filter plugged.
Replace the oil filter cartridge.
Gear pump failing.
Check the output pressure from the
gear pump. If below specs, repair or
replace the pump.
Contamination in the hydraulic system.
Drain, flush and refill the system.
General Information Regarding Checking Hydraulic Pressures
Accurate measurements are the key to troubleshooting a hydraulic system. Once you obtain accurate
measurements you can compare them to the specifications to analyze a problem.
You can use digital tachometers, flow gauges/meters or pressure gauges to troubleshoot the hydraulic
system. The pressure gauge should have a range of 0 to 3000 psi (see the Special Tools section). The flow
meter must be rated to 3000 psi and 10 gal./min.
The most convenient way to check for oil flow is to check the RPM of the motor that is performing poorly.
Refer to the following tables to determine the motor RPM. If the motor speed is correct, the pump is
producing the correct amount of oil flow. However, this does not mean that if a motor is running too slow the
problem is in the pump.
The following information should be used to check for correct system pressure. The readings are nominal
measured figures, and there will be variations due to manufacturing tolerances and system oil temperature.
If any reading varies greater than 20 percent, there will be a noticeable loss of performance and the problem
should be corrected.
134
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Checking the Gear Pump Pressure
Note: There is Test Port on the Gear
Pump that can be used to check
the Gear Pump pressure.
Test
Port
1. Connect the pressure gauge to the Test Port on
the Gear Pump.
2. Run the engine in the high throttle position
and allow the hydraulic oil to warm up.
Gear
Pump
3. Refer to the following tables to determine if
the gear pump and/or hydraulic motor is
operating correctly.
Note: All of the following readings were
static, taken on a smooth painted
concrete surface.
Measured Pressure at
the Gear Pump Test
Port
Machine Condition
High RPM, nothing running
380 psi
High RPM, main broom only running, standard broom, two-inch wide brush pattern on
concrete, vacuum fan turned off
1,275 psi
High RPM, main broom off, vacuum fan turned on, side brooms off
1,650 psi
High RPM, main broom on, two-inch wide brush pattern on concrete, vacuum fan
turned on, side brooms off
1,770 psi
High RPM, main broom on, two-inch wide brush pattern on concrete, vacuum fan
turned on, side brooms on
1,810 psi
High RPM, raising empty hopper
Time to raise hopper – 10/11 seconds
2,875 psi
High RPM, lowering empty hopper
Time to lower hopper – 7 seconds
380 psi
High RPM, opening hopper door, nothing else running
20 psi
High RPM, closing hopper door, nothing else running
50 psi
Two side brooms running, nothing else running
360 psi
One side broom running, nothing else running
425 psi
Machine Condition
Measured Motor
Speed
Two side brooms on the floor
103 RPM
One side broom on the floor
130 RPM
Main broom with a two-inch pattern
405 RPM
Vacuum fan impeller
8,920 RPM
135
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Checking the Piston Pump Pressure
Note: Checking the piston pump hydraulic pressure will require you to assemble the appropriate
fittings that will allow you to connect your pressure gauge to a suitable location.
Measured Pressure from
the Piston Pump
Machine Condition
Level surface, 70°F ambient temperature,
empty hopper and tank.
Pedal fully depressed – 700 psi
Pedal 1/2 depressed – 600 psi
Hydraulic Truth Table
Electrical Solenoid’s Energized Status
Solenoid Function
S1
S2
S3
S4
Hopper Raise (UP)
S5
S6
X
X
S7
S8
Hopper Lower (DN)
Dump Door Open
X
X
Dump Door Closed
X
Main Broom State ON
X
Main/Side Broom State ON
X
X
X
Dust Control ON Wand
State (**)
X
X
X
Dust Control OFF Bypass (*)
X
Side Broom Lower
X
Side Broom Raise & Turn OFF
Side Broom Motor
0V
No Hydraulic Manifold
Functions
S9
System
overload
in relief
S6 not
energized
(***)
* Operator sweeping wet debris with the dust control fan (impeller) turned off.
** Operator using vacuum wand option. The dust control fan operates when the machine’s drive is
stationary. To vacuum, attach the suction hose wand to the special hopper inlet fitting.
*** The S6 solenoid valve assembly bypasses the sweep system components and sends its hydraulic oil
flow to the tank when S6 is de-energized (0 volts).
136
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Specifications
General Specifications
Component
Specifications
System Capacity
11 gal. (41.6 L)
Fluid Type
SAE 10w-30 motor oil
Type – manually-variable displacement piston pump, tow
valve included
Displacement – 0 to 2.48 CIR
Speed – 3600 RPM max.
Piston Pump
Continuous pressure – 3000 psi [206.8 bar]
Maximum pressure – 5000 psi [344.7 bar]
Main Loop Relief Valve Set Point – 3000 psi [206.8 bar]
Type – external spur gear, positive displacement
Gear Pump
Displacement – 1.02 CIR
Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly
Solenoid Valves
S1, S2, S3, S4,
S5, S6, S7 and
S9
Nominal Coil Resistance – 9 ohms
(measured on one machine)
Solenoid Valve
S8
Nominal Coil Resistance – 6.5 ohms
(measured on one machine)
137
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly
S3
S2
S4 Only
Installed on
Models with
Litter Vac Kit
S5
S7
S9
Hydraulic
Manifold
Assembly
S8
S1
S6
Solenoid
Valve
Hydraulic Circuit Function
S1
Hopper Close/Open
S2
Main Broom
S3
Side Broom
Component Description
Solenoid-actuated, 2/2 directional poppet, pilot
operated cartridge valve
Solenoid-actuated 4/2 directional spool, direct acting
cartridge valve
S7
Hopper Open
S5
Hopper Up/Down
S9
Lower Hopper
S6
Hopper Up Bypass
S8
Dust Control Bypass
Solenoid-actuated 3/2 directional spool, direct acting
cartridge valve
Coil
Used on S1-S7, S9
12 VDC; nominal coil resistance – 9 Ω.
Coil
Used on S8
Solenoid-actuated 2/2 directional poppet, direct acting
cartridge valve
Solenoid-actuated 2/2 directional poppet, pilot
operated cartridge valve
12 VDC; nominal coil resistance – 6.5 Ω.
Note: The following solenoid valves are interchangeable:
• S1 and S2
• S3 and S7
• S5 and S9
Also note that S1, S2, S3, S5, S6, S7 and S9 all use the same solenoid coil.
138
Service Manual – SW8000
Special Tools
Hydraulic test gauge w/connector, 3000 PSI range, p/n 56504516
Flow Meter – rated at 3000 psi and 10 gal./min. (typical shown)
Various hydraulic fittings required to connect hydraulic test gauge into
hydraulic circuits
Hydraulic System
139
Service Manual – SW8000
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Schematic, 56507055, Rev. L
Dual Side Broom Option
Side Broom Lift Cyl.
1.00 x 1.18 x .50
Side Broom Lift Cyl.
1.00 x 1.18 x .50
25 PSI
25 PSI
To Side
Broom
Side Broom Lift Cyl.
1.00 x 1.18 x .50
CF
Side
Broom
Motor
6.1
CIR
6.1
CIR
Side
Broom
Motor
E
EX
25 PSI
IN
E
F
F
Side Broom Speed Control Option
D
6.1
CIR
J1
K
Side
Broom
Motor
Main
Broom
Motor
Hopper Dump Cyl.
1.5 x 3.75 x .75
Steering Cyl.
1.75 x 8.5 x .75
2.45
CIR
R
A
T
T1
B
C
D
.086
Piloted
Check Valve
Hopper
Close/Open
L
P
2.9 GPM
S6
Hopper
Lower
2500
PSI
Oil Cooler
Hopper S5
Up/Down
.037
J1
J
5.7 GPM
S8
Main S2
Broom
8.6
GPM
Filter
15 GPM
K
Captive
Plug
P
S9
L
.078
N
M
1500
PSI
Piston
Pump B
2400
RPM
3000
PSI
2.48
CIR
A 100
Tow
Valve
3000
PSI
Gear
Pump
Drive
B Motor
22.8
CIR
1.02
CIR
A
PSI
Drive Wheel System
Reservoir
1.02
CIR
AC Hydraulic
Compressor Motor
AC Option
.161
CIR
Hopper
Up Bypass
T
50 PSI
H
Dust Control
Bypass
Open
2.0
GPM
G
Side
Broom
S3
S7 Hopper
Steering
4.88 CIR
F
Pilot Operated
Hydraulic Valve
S1
1100
PSI
E
4:1
Hopper Lift Cyl.
2.5 x 15.125 x 1.25
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly
Dust
Control
System
140
Service Manual – SW8000
141
Options and Accessories
Description
Left Hand Side Broom
Rear Bumper Kit
(For Non-Cab models)
Tilt Steering Kit
Illustration
Service Manual – SW8000
Description
Raised Air Intake Kit for use with
Overhead Guard
Hopper Temperature Sensor Kit
Fire Extinguisher Kit
(For Non-Cab models)
Options and Accessories
Illustration
142
Service Manual – SW8000
Description
Hopper Bottom Plate Kit
Suspension Seat Kit
Options and Accessories
Illustration
143
Service Manual – SW8000
Description
DustGuard Premist Kit
Seat Belt Kit
Options and Accessories
Illustration
144
Service Manual – SW8000
Description
Right and Left Side
Broom Guard Kits
Plugged Filter Switch Kit
Options and Accessories
Illustration
145
Service Manual – SW8000
Description
Litter Vac Kit
Raised Air Intake Kit, without
Overhead Guard
Options and Accessories
Illustration
146
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Description
Illustration
Rear Work Light
Curb Work Light
Work Light Kit
The Work Light Kit includes three lights:
a Curb Work Light, a Rear Work Light,
and a Trouble Light.
Trouble Light
Back Up Alarm Kit
The Back-Up Alarm Kit includes the
Back-Up Alarm, electrical connector
and mounting hardware. The Back-Up
Alarm connects to the existing machine
wiring to sound a warning when the
machine is moving in reverse.
Brake/Signal Light Kit
Front Turn Light
Rear Turn and
Tail Lights
147
Service Manual – SW8000
Description
Overhead Guard Kit
Amber Strobe Kit,
without Overhead Guard
Options and Accessories
Illustration
148
Service Manual – SW8000
Description
Amber Strobe Kit,
with Overhead Guard
Cab Side Mirror Option
Raised Air Intake Kit for use with Cab
Options and Accessories
Illustration
149
Service Manual – SW8000
Description
Amber Strobe Kit for use with Cab
Options and Accessories
Illustration
150
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
SW8000 Deluxe Cab Options
The SW8000 Deluxe Cab is available with two levels of environmental control that provide additional
comfort and convenience for the Operator, and add additional functionality to the machine.
• An optional cab heater is available which includes a pressurized cab with an external air filter.
• An optional heating and air conditioning system, along with pressurized cab is available that provides
Operator comfort throughout a wide range of ambient temperatures.
Technical Specifications
Total Machine Height with Cab
(Refer to Figure below.)
79.5 in (202 cm) without Amber Strobe Kit
84.5 in (215 cm) with Amber Strobe Kit installed
System Voltage
12 VDC
Heater Temperature Control
Electronic Water Valve w/Bypass
(1) Fasco OEM p/n 2807-510-154, Fasco p/n DC136,
1/8 HP, 4200 RPM, three-speed, 4.5 Amp
(2) SPAL type 008-A37/C-42D, 4.5 Amp
Heating System
Blower Motors
A/C System
Refrigerant
R-134a, 1.3 lbs.
Condenser Fan Motor
Heating System Capacity
SPAL, type VA13-AP9/C-35S, 6.9 Amp
ICE TM-08-HD, 5 cu. in. (82.0 cc) per revolution, 7006000 RPM
Sauer-Danfoss p/n 121.20.045.00, 1.02 cu. in. (16.7
cc) displacement
20,000 BTUs/hr.
Air Conditioning System Capacity
13,000 BTUs/hr.
Compressor
Compressor Motor
Figure 1. Cab Height
151
Service Manual – SW8000
Cab Controls
(Refer to Figure 2)
1. Cooling Fan Switch
2. Dome Light
3. Heater A/C Fan Switch
4. Heater Temperature Control
5. A/C On/Off Switch
6. Windshield Wiper Switch
Figure 2. Cab Controls
Options and Accessories
152
Service Manual – SW8000
Heating System Components
(Refer to Figure 3)
7. Blower Motor
8. Blower Assembly
9. Heater Core
10. Heater Air Box Assembly
11. Filter
12. Coolant Tube (From Engine Radiator)
13. Cab Filter Cover
14. Heater Hoses
15. Heater Control Assembly
16. HVAC Relay
Figure 3. Heating System Components
Options and Accessories
153
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Air Conditioning System Components
(Refer to Figure 4)
17. Evaporator-Heater Unit
18. A/C Condenser
19. Binary Pressure Switch
20. A/C Receiver/Dryer
21. A/C Compressor
22. Hydraulic Compressor Motor
23. Air Filter
24. Cab Filter Cover
25. Coolant Tube (From Engine Radiator)
26. Heater Hoses
27. Heater Control Assembly
28. Accessory (Gear) Hydraulic Pump
29. Compressor Motor Hydraulic Valve
30. Compressor Relay
31. HVAC Relay
Figure 4. Air Conditioning System Components
154
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Maintenance
Warning! Turn the key switch off and remove the key from the ignition switch before performing any
machine maintenance.
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance intervals given are for average operating conditions. Machines used in severe operational
environments may require service more often.
Maintenance Item
Check for any coolant, hydraulic or refrigerant leaks.
Note: Refrigerant leaks can appear as dirty, oily areas
around A/C components and fittings.
Check the cab filter and clean or replace as necessary.
Note: The cab filter may need to be cleaned or
replaced more often if the machine is operated in dusty
environments.
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
X
Hours
8-12
X
40
Clean the heater core fins and air box (heater only).
X
160
Clean the evaporator and heater core fins inside the
evaporator-heater unit (A/C only).
X
160
Clean the condenser fins (A/C only).
X
To Clean and Replace the Cab Filter
(Refer to Figure 5)
1. Remove the four screws holding the Cab Filter Cover, then
remove the Cab Filter Cover and Filter from the machine.
2. Clean the Filter using any of the following methods:
• Tap the Filter gently on a flat surface (dirty side down).
• Clean the Filter with compressed air (100 psi max.) blown
from the inside (cab side) of the Filter.
• Soak the Filter in warm water for 15 minutes, rinse with
clean water (40 psi max. water pressure), then air-dry (don’t
use compressed air). Make sure the Filter is completely dry
before reinstalling.
3. Reinstall the Filter and Cab Filter Cover, then reinstall and
tighten the four screws.
Figure 5. Cab Filter
40
155
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Heating System
General System Overview
The SW8000 cab heating system uses an electronic Heater Control Assembly to direct the appropriate
amount of engine coolant to the Heater Core in the Heater Air Box Assembly . The Blower Assembly in the
Heater Air Box Assembly blows filtered air through the Heater Core to provide warm air to the cab.
A four-port bypass butterfly valve in the Heater Control Assembly, run by a small electric motor, controls
the coolant flow to the Heater Core. The Heater Temperature Control in the cab controls the voltage to the
valve motor, and uses a feedback potentiometer to sense the position of the butterfly valve.
Electrical Circuit Overview
Heater Blower Motor
The following conditions must be met for the blower motor to function:
Positive (+) Voltage
• The key switch (S1)must be in either the accessory or ignition position to provide +12 VDC (GRN/BLU
wire) to the 20A circuit breaker CB4.
• Circuit breaker CB4 must be closed to provide +12 VDC (VIO wire) to the control side (coil) of the HVAC
Relay K8.
• The 20A circuit breaker CB9 must be closed to provide voltage (RED/VIO wire) to the input load side of
the HVAC Relay K8.
• HVAC Relay K8 must be closed to provide +12 VDC (VIO/GRAY wire) to the positive terminal on the Fan
Switch S30.
• The Fan Switch S30 must be set to the Low (YEL wire), Medium (RED wire) or High (ORN wire) position
to provide +12 VDC to the corresponding terminal on the Blower Motor M6.
Negative (–) Voltage
The Blower Motor M6 must be connected to battery negative (BLK wire).
The control side (coil) of the HVAC Relay K8 must be connected to battery negative (BLK wire).
Heater Temperature Control
The following conditions must be met for the heater temperature control to function:
Positive (+) Voltage
• The key switch must be in either the accessory or ignition position to provide +12 VDC (GRN/BLU wire)
to the 20A circuit breaker CB4.
• Circuit breaker CB4 must be closed to provide +12 VDC (VIO wire) to the control side (coil) of the HVAC
Relay K8.
• The 20A circuit breaker CB9 must be closed to provide voltage (RED/VIO wire) to the input load side of
the HVAC Relay K8.
• HVAC Relay K8 must be closed to provide +12 VDC (VIO/GRAY to RED wire) to the Heater Temperature
Control E1.
Negative (–) Voltage
The Heater Temperature Control E1 (BLK wire) must be connected to battery ground.
The control side (coil) of the HVAC Relay K8 must be connected to battery negative (BLK wire).
156
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Electrical Troubleshooting
Note: Refer to the Electrical Wiring and Ladder Diagrams in the Appendix.
Symptom: The heater Blower Motor will not run.
The Blower Motor is
not working.
Is there 12V at the VIO/GRA
wire on the Fan Switch S30?
(ref. to bat. neg. w/key
switch on)
Yes
Is there voltage at each of
the three positive terminals
on Fan Switch S30 when
the Switch is set to the
corresponding fan speed?
(YEL, RED and ORN wires
ref. to bat. neg.)
No
Replace the Fan
Switch S30.
No
Reset or replace
circuit breaker
CB4.
No
Is there continuity
through 20A circuit
breaker CB4?
Yes
Reset or replace
circuit breaker
CB9.
No
Is there continuity
through 20A circuit
breaker CB9?
Yes
Replace the
Relay.
No
Does the resistance of
Relay coil K8 measure
85 ±20%?
Yes
Replace the
relay.
No
Is there continuity
through the load
contacts on K8
(terminals 30 and 87)
when the coil is
energized?
Yes
Check the connectors
and wiring and repair
as necessary.
Yes
Is there continuity in the
YEL, RED and ORN wires
from Fan Switch S30 to the
positive terminals on the
Blower Motor M6?
No
Repair the
wires.
No
Repair the
wire.
Yes
Is there 12V in the BLK
wire from the negative
terminal on the Blower
Motor M6 ref. to bat. pos.?
Yes
Replace the
Blower Motor M6.
157
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Symptom: There is no cab heat, or the cab heat cannot be controlled.
Note: Before troubleshooting the heating system, make sure the engine is up to normal operating
temperature, the engine coolant is at the recommended level and there are no air locks in the cooling system.
(Refer to the To Eliminate Air Locks from the Cooling System subsection.)
To Troubleshoot the Valve Assembly
Valve Assembly
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from
the Valve Assembly.
2. Carefully connect a 12 VDC source to
the Motor (-) and Motor (+) pins (directly
or via the BLK/WHT and ORN wires in
the connector) to run the butterfly valve
motor independently without input from
the heater temperature control.
3. Check for the heated coolant being
switched on and off to the heater core.
Note that it will take approximately
15-20 seconds for the valve motor to run
between its full-off and full-on positions.
Motor (-) Pin
Motor (+) Pin
• If the valve motor isn’t running, replace the Valve Assembly.
Feedback (-) Pin
• If the valve motor appears to be
running correctly, continue on to step
5 below.
Feedback Pot Pin
Feedback (+) Pin
4. Check the resistance through the
Figure 6. Valve Assembly Connector Pins
Feedback Pins to determine if the
feedback potentiometer in the Valve Assembly is working correctly. The resistance values should be
close to those shown in the table below.
Valve Open to Heater Core,
Heater Temperature Control set
to Hot (full clockwise)
Valve Closed to Heater Core,
Heater Temperature Control set
to Cold (full counterclockwise)
Valve Halfway Open, Heater
Temperature Control set to
approximate midpoint
Ohmmeter Connections
Resistance (Approximate)
Feedback (+) Pin and Feedback (-) Pin
5.71 kW
Feedback (+) Pin and Feedback Pot Pin
5.55 kW
Feedback Pot Pin and Feedback (-) Pin
0.88 kW
Feedback (+) Pin and Feedback (-) Pin
5.71 kW
Feedback (+) Pin and Feedback Pot Pin
0.48 kW
Feedback Pot Pin and Feedback (-) Pin
5.63 kW
Feedback (+) Pin and Feedback (-) Pin
5.71 kW
Feedback (+) Pin and Feedback Pot Pin
3.14 kW
Feedback Pot Pin and Feedback (-) Pin
3.25 kW
5. If the Feedback Pin resistance values are not close to those shown in the above table, it indicates that
the feedback potentiometer in the Valve Assembly is not working correctly. Replace the Valve Assembly.
158
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
To Troubleshoot the Heater Temperature Control
There is no Cab heat/the Cab
heat cannot be controlled.
Is there 12V to the Heater
Temperature Control (BLK and
RED wires)?
No
Check the wiring to the Heater
Temperature Control and repair
as necessary.
No
Is there continuity in all five
wires from the Heater
Temperature Control to the Valve
Assembly Connector?
Yes
Is there approximately +/- 9.75V
at the Valve Assembly
Connector (BLK/WHT and
ORN wires) when the Heater
Temperature Control E1 is
rotated between cold and hot?
No
Repair the wiring
as necessary.
Yes
Replace the Heater
Temperature Control.
Yes
Is there continuity in the three
feedback pot wires (WHT, VIO and
GRN) from the Heater Temperature
Control to the Valve Assembly
Connector?
No
Repair the wiring
as necessary.
Yes
Replace the Heater
Temperature Control.
Service Note: If you have to replace the Heater Temperature Control in the cab, we recommend that
you do so as follows:
1. Remove the Overhead Control Plate from the cab.
2. Disassemble the Heater Temperature Control from the Overhead Control Plate.
3. Cut the seven wires going to the Heater Temperature Control at the point where they enter the sealed
back of the module.
4. Check the continuity of the five wires going to the Valve Assembly (VIO, WHT, GRN, GRA/BLK WHT,
and ORN).
• If there is continuity in all five wires from the cab to the Valve Assembly, continue to step 5.
• If there is no continuity in any of the five wires from the cab to the Valve Assembly, you will need to
either repair the wires or run new wires to the Valve Assembly.
5. Install the replacement Heater Temperature Control on the Overhead Control Plate.
6. Splice the original wires from the Valve Assembly to the replacement Heater Temperature Control using
butt connectors and heat-shrink insulation.
7. Reinstall the Overhead Control Plate in the cab.
159
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
To Eliminate Air Locks from the Cooling System
Air locks (air bubbles) in the cooling system can prevent normal coolant flow to the heater core. One factor
that can contribute to the formation of air locks is the fact that the heater cores in the SW8000 cabs are the
highest point in the machine’s cooling system. This can make it difficult to purge the air from the system
using traditional methods more common to the automotive industry.
Cooling System Vacuum Filler
One recommended method for removing air locks is to drain the cooling system completely, then refill the
system using a cooling system vacuum filler tool. This type of tool uses a Venturi vacuum generator to
remove the air from the radiator as it fills the radiator with coolant.
Purge the Heater Circuit
Another method is to remove the hoses that run from the Valve Assembly to the heater core, fill the hoses
with coolant to remove as much air as possible from the heater circuit, reinstall the hoses, then run the
machine with the heater on to purge any remaining air from the system. Figure 7 shows the heater hose
functions for reference.
Warning! Before attempting to remove the heater hoses, make sure:
−− The engine is switched off.
−− The machine coolant has cooled to a low enough temperature so as not to cause burns or
injury to persons contacting the hoses or coolant.
−− The cooling system temperature and pressure have decreased enough to allow you to
remove the radiator cap to relieve the system pressure before removing the hoses.
Coolant Supply
from Engine
Coolant Return
to Engine
Coolant Supply
to Heater Core
Coolant Return
from Heater Core
Figure 7. Valve Assembly Hose Functions
160
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Air Conditioning System
Note: Refer to the schematics at the end of this chapter.
General System Overview
The SW8000 cab air conditioning system uses a Hydraulic Compressor Motor (22), powered by the Gear
(Accessory) Hydraulic Pump (28), to run the A/C Compressor (21). The A/C Compressor compresses the
refrigerant and transfers the hot, high-pressure refrigerant gas to the A/C Condenser (18) at the rear of the
machine which condenses the refrigerant gas into a liquid. The condensed high-pressure liquid refrigerant
travels from the A/C Condenser to the A/C Receiver/Dryer (20), then to the expansion valve and evaporator
inside the Evaporator-Heater Unit (17) inside the cab. The cold, low-pressure refrigerant gas then returns
to the A/C Compressor to complete the refrigeration cycle.
The Operator moderates the cab cooling by “mixing in” heated air from the heater core in the EvaporatorHeater Unit by adjusting the Heater Temperature Control (4).
The Thermostat (S33) (normally closed) has a temperature probe that is inserted into the evaporator coil in
the Evaporator-Heater Unit. When the temperature of the evaporator coil reaches 39.5°F, the Thermostat
closes to enable the A/C system. When the temperature of the evaporator coil drops to 31°F, the Thermostat
opens to switch off the A/C system.
The Binary Pressure Switch (S34) (19) (normally closed), located on top of the A/C Receiver/Dryer, will
interrupt the +12 VDC to the Compressor Motor Hydraulic Valve (L10) (29) to switch off the Hydraulic
Compressor Motor and A/C Compressor under the following two conditions:
The refrigerant line pressure drops below 30 psig, indicating an insufficient amount of refrigerant in the
system.
The refrigerant line pressure rises above 270 psig, indicating an overheated or unsafe condition.
The Compressor Relay (K10) (30) will interrupt the +12 VDC to the Compressor Motor Hydraulic Valve
(L10) to switch off the Hydraulic Compressor Motor and A/C Compressor whenever the hopper is raised.
Electrical Circuit Overview
Blower Motors
The following conditions must be met for the blower motors to function:
Positive (+) Voltage
• The key switch must be in either the accessory or ignition position to provide +12 VDC (GRN/BLU
wire) to the 20A circuit breaker CB4.
• Circuit breaker CB4 must be closed to provide +12 VDC (VIO wire) to the control side (coil) of the
HVAC Relay K8.
• The 20A circuit breaker CB9 must be closed to provide voltage (RED/VIO wire) to the load side of the
HVAC Relay K8.
• The HVAC Relay K8 must be closed to provide +12 VDC (VIO/GRAY wire) to the positive terminal on
the Fan Switch S30.
• The Fan Switch S30 must be set to the Low (YEL wire), Medium (RED wire) or High (ORN wire)
position to provide +12 VDC to the corresponding terminals on the Blower Motors M9 and M10.
Negative (–) Voltage
The Blower Motors M9 and M10 must be connected to battery negative (BLK wires).
The control side (coil) of the HVAC Relay K8 must be connected to battery negative (BLK wire).
161
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Condenser Fan, Thermostat, Pressure Switch and Compressor Motor
The following conditions must be met for the air conditioning system to function:
Positive (+) Voltage
• The key switch must be in either the accessory or ignition position to provide +12 VDC (GRN/BLU wire)
to the 20A circuit breaker CB4.
• Circuit breaker CB4 must be closed to provide +12 VDC (VIO wire) to the control side (coil) of the HVAC
Relay K8.
• The 20A circuit breaker CB9 must be closed to provide voltage (RED/VIO wire) to the load side of the
HVAC Relay K8.
• HVAC Relay K8 must be closed to provide +12 VDC (VIO/GRA wire) to the positive terminal on the Fan
Switch S30.
• The Fan Switch S30 must be set to the Low, Medium or High position to provide +12 VDC (RED/WHT
wire) to the AC Switch S35.
• The AC Switch S35 must be closed to provide +12 VDC to:
• The control side (coil) of the Condenser Fan Relay K9 (WHT wire).
• The input terminal on the Thermostat S33 (BLK/WHT wire).
• The Thermostat S33 (normally closed) must be closed to provide +12 VDC (GRN wire) to the input
terminal on the Pressure Switch S34.
• The Binary Pressure Switch S34 (normally closed) must be closed to provide +12 VDC (GRN/WHT wire)
to the load side of the Compressor Relay K10 (terminal 30).
• The load side of the Compressor Relay K10 (normally closed) must be closed to provide +12 VDC (BLU/
BRN wire from terminal 87a) to the Compressor Hydraulic Valve L10.
Note: The Compressor Relay K10 coil (control side) is wired in parallel with the Hopper Up/
Down Hydraulic Valve L5. When the Raise Hopper switch is pressed, it actuates the Hopper
Up/Down Hydraulic Valve L5 to raise the hopper, and actuates the Compressor Relay
K10 coil to open the circuit to the Compressor Hydraulic Valve L10 and switch off the A/C
compressor motor. This feature allows the machine to use the maximum available hydraulic
force to raise the hopper.
Negative (–) Voltage
• The control side (coil) of the Condenser Fan Relay K9 must be connected to battery negative (BLK wire).
• The control side (coil) of the Compressor Hydraulic Valve L10 must be connected to battery negative
(BLK wire).
• The control side (coil) of the HVAC Relay K8 must be connected to battery negative (BLK wire).
162
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Electrical Troubleshooting
Note: Refer to the Cab Electrical Wiring and Ladder Diagrams at the end of this chapter.
Symptom: One or both of the Blower Motors will not run.
One or both of the
Blower Motors will
not run.
Is there 12V at VIO/GRA
wire on Fan Switch S30?
(ref. to bat. neg. w/key
switch on)
Yes
Is there voltage at each of
the three positive terminals
on Fan Switch S30 when
the Switch is set to the
corresponding fan speed?
(YEL, RED and ORN wires
ref. to bat. neg.)
No
Replace the Fan
Switch.
No
Reset or replace
circuit breaker
CB4.
No
Is there continuity
through 20A circuit
breaker CB4?
Yes
Reset or replace
circuit breaker
CB9.
No
Is there continuity
through 20A circuit
breaker CB9?
Yes
Replace the
Relay.
No
Does the resistance of
Relay coil K8 measure
85 ±20%?
Yes
Replace the
Relay.
No
Is there continuity
through the load
contacts on K8
(terminals 30 and 87)
when the coil is
energized?
Yes
Check the connectors
and wiring and repair
as necessary.
Yes
Is there continuity in the
YEL, RED and ORN wires
from Fan Switch S30 to
positive terminals on Blower
Motors M9 and M10?
No
Repair the
wires.
No
Repair the
wire(s).
Yes
Is there 12V in the BLK
wire from negative terminal
on Blower Motors M9 and
M10 ref. to bat. pos.?
Yes
Replace Blower
Motor M9 and/or
M10.
163
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Symptom: The Blower Motors run but there is no cold air coming out of the Evaporator-Heater Unit.
Note: Before troubleshooting the air conditioning system, make sure the system is filled with
the recommended amount of refrigerant. We recommend that you have this checked by a
qualified technician or an EPA-certified air conditioning repair shop.
Note: Refer to the Cab Electrical Wiring and Ladder Diagrams in Appendix, and the Component
Troubleshooting subsections on the following pages.
There is no cold air from
the Evaporator-Heater
Unit.
Check the cartridge on
Hydraulic Valve L10 and
clean/replace as necessary.
Yes
Is there 12V across the coil on
the Compressor Hydraulic Valve
L10 (hopper down, A/C
switched on)?
No
Check/replace A/C
Switch S35.
No
Is there 12V at the WHT wire on
A/C Switch S35 (ref. to bat. neg.
w/A/C Switch S35 on)?
Yes
Check/replace
Thermostat S33.
No
Is there 12V at the GRN wire on
the Thermostat S33 (ref. to bat.
neg.)?
Yes
The A/C system is
overheated. Check the
Condenser Fan Relay K9,
Condenser Fan and associated
wiring and replace/repair as
necessary.
No
Is there 12V at the GRN/WHT
wire on the Pressure Switch S34
(ref. to bat. neg.)?
Yes
Check the function of the
Compressor Relay K10 and
wiring and repair/replace as
necessary.
No
Is there 12V at the BLU/BRN
wire on the Compressor Relay
K10 (ref. to bat. neg. with the
Hopper down)?
Yes
Check the auxiliary pump,
compressor motor and related
hydraulics.
No
Is the hydraulic pressure at the
auxiliary pump test port within
specs?
Yes
Check the compressor and air
conditioning system components.
164
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Component Troubleshooting
Compressor Motor Hydraulic Valve (L10)
(Refer to Figure 8)
Note: The Compressor Motor Hydraulic Valve and Hydraulic Pressure Test Port are attached to
the tee-fitting off of the Accessory Hydraulic Pump.
1. Disconnect the Electrical Connector from the Hydraulic Valve.
2. Switch on the A/C and check for 12 VDC at the Electrical Connector.
3. Check the coil resistance of the Hydraulic Valve. It should be approximately 7 ohms ±20%.
4. If there is 12 VDC at the Electrical Connector and the coil resistance is within spec, disassemble the
Hydraulic Valve and clean or replace the cartridge as necessary.
Hydraulic
Valve (L10)
Electrical
Connector
Figure 8. Compressor Motor Hydraulic Valve
Hydraulic
Pressure
Test Port
Accessory
Hydraulic
Pump
165
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Accessory (Gear) Hydraulic Pump
(Refer to Figure 8)
1. Connect a hydraulic pressure gauge to the Hydraulic Pressure Test Port off of the Accessory Hydraulic
Pump.
2. Start the engine, then switch the A/C on and off at the two engine speeds and note the hydraulic
pressures at the Hydraulic Pressure Test Port. The following chart shows pressure values that
are representative of what you should be reading at normal operating temperature if the Accessory
Hydraulic Pump, Hydraulic Valve and compressor motor are working correctly. Note that pressures
tend to be higher if the hydraulic system is below normal operating temperature.
Hydraulic Pressure at Test
Port (typical)
Engine at idle, A/C off
500 psi
Engine at idle, A/C on
880 psi
Engine at high speed, A/C off
675 psi
Engine at high speed, A/C on
1100 psi
Difference in Hydraulic
Pressure between A/C off
and A/C on
380 psi
425 psi
If you don’t observe differences in the hydraulic pressures similar to those in the above chart when switching
the A/C on and off, it could indicate a problem with the Hydraulic Valve (L10), the Accessory Hydraulic
Pump or the A/C compressor motor.
Compressor Relay (K10)
(Refer to Figure 9)
Note: The Compressor Relay is located in the engine compartment below the main broom lever.
1. Make sure the hopper is down, then switch on the A/C.
2. Back-probe the BLU/BRN wire connected to the Compressor Relay.
• If you see 12 VDC at the BLU/BRN wire referenced to battery negative, the Compressor Relay is
working correctly.
• If you don’t see 12 VDC at the BLU/BRN wire, proceed to step 3 below.
3. Remove the electrical connector from the Compressor Relay and check for continuity across the load
terminals (30 and 87a).
Note: The Compressor Relay is a normally-closed relay and should have continuity across the load
terminals with the electrical connector removed.
• If there is continuity across load terminals 30 and 87a, the Compressor Relay is working correctly. Check the connections and wiring upstream of the Compressor Relay and repair/replace as necessary.
• If there is very high resistance or no continuity across terminals 30 and 87a, replace the Compressor
Relay.
166
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Compressor
Relay (K10)
Figure 9. Compressor Relay
Warning! High-pressure side air conditioning components, fittings, lines and hoses can be extremely
hot after operation and can cause severe burns. Always use the appropriate precautions
when working around the Binary Pressure Switch, Receiver/Dryer or other A/C components.
Binary Pressure Switch (S34)
(Refer to Figure 10)
Note: The Binary Pressure Switch is mounted to the top of the A/C Receiver/Dryer at the rear of
the machine, behind the hydraulic oil tank.
1. Open the rear Cover Assembly at the back of the cab.
2. Remove the electrical connector from the Binary Pressure Switch and check for continuity across the two
terminals.
Note: The Binary Pressure Switch is normally closed and should have continuity across the
terminals if the A/C system is charged adequately and is at normal ambient temperature.
• If there is continuity across the terminals, the Binary Pressure Switch is working correctly.
• If there is very high resistance or no continuity across the terminals, replace the Binary Pressure
Switch.
167
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Binary Pressure
Switch (S34)
A/C Receiver/Dryer
Figure 10. Checking Continuity through the Binary Pressure Switch
168
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Thermostat (S33)
(Refer to Figure 11)
Note: The Thermostat is located inside the Evaporator-Heater Unit in the cab.
1. Remove the top cover/nozzle assembly from the Evaporator-Heater Unit.
2. Remove the front panel from the Evaporator-Heater Unit.
3. Remove the two electrical connectors (BLK/WHT and GRN wires) from the Thermostat and check the
continuity across the two terminals.
Note: The Thermostat is normally closed and should have continuity across the terminals at
ambient temperatures above 31° F.
• If there is continuity across the terminals, the Thermostat is working correctly.
• If there is very high resistance or no continuity across the terminals, replace the Thermostat.
Service Note: To verify that the thermostat is operating correctly, spray electronic component
cooler or canned air dusting spray onto the probe embedded in the evaporator coils
to cool the probe to below 31° F.
• The Thermostat should open and you should read an open circuit through the terminals with the probe
below 31° F.
• Once the probe warms up to 39.5° F, there should again be continuity through the Thermostat
terminals.
169
Service Manual – SW8000
Thermostat (S33)
Figure 11. Checking Continuity through the Thermostat
Options and Accessories
170
Service Manual – SW8000
Options and Accessories
Heating and A/C System Plumbing and Hydraulic Flow Schematic
1. Heater Core
2. AC Evaporator
3. Radiator Coolant Tube
4. Feed Hot Water
5. Return Flow
6. Heater Control Valve
7. Hydraulic Test Port
8. Low Pressure Refrigerant (Gas)
9. High Pressure Gas
10. High Pressure Liquid
171
Service Manual – SW8000
172
Steering System
Functional Description
Overview
The steering system includes the
Steering Wheel, Steering Control
Unit, Steering Cylinder and Drive
Yoke Weldment.
The Steering Wheel rotates the
shaft on the Steering Control Unit
which controls the oil flow to the
Steering Cylinder. The Steering
Cylinder extends and retracts to
rotate Drive Yoke Weldment to steer
the Rear Wheel Assembly.
Steering
Control
Unit
Steering
Wheel
Steering
Cylinder
Drive
Yoke
Weldment
Rear Wheel
Assembly
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
The “A” port on the
Hydraulic Manifold Assembly
supplies hydraulic oil to
the “P” (pressure) port on
the Steering Control Unit.
The oil from the “T” (tank)
port on the Steering Control
Unit goes to the “T1” port
on the Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly, then to the oil
cooler, filter and reservoir.
Hydraulic
Manifold
Assembly
Steering
Control
Unit
L
A
T1
P
R
The Steering Cylinder
is connected to the “R”
and “L” ports on the
Steering Control Unit.
When the Operator turns
the steering wheel, the
T
Steering Control Unit
directs the oil to the “R”
or “L” port on the Steering
Cylinder to steer the
machine right or left.
L
R
Steering
Cylinder
173
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Hydraulic Diagrams
Steering Control Unit Description
The Steering Control Unit uses the input from
the steering wheel to turn the drive wheel in
the appropriate direction to steer the machine.
When the Operator turns the steering wheel,
the steering wheel shaft rotates the Rotary
Valve and Rotary Meter, which are connected by
a mechanical link inside of the Steering Control
Unit.
• The direction in which the Rotary Valve
moves determines which side of the
Steering Cylinder receives the hydraulic oil
to turn the drive wheel left or right. Note
that when the Operator stops turning the
steering wheel, the springs in the Steering
Control Unit return the Rotary Valve to the
neutral (closed) position to hold the Steering
Cylinder rod in its current position.
• The number of degrees that the Rotary
Meter rotates determines the volume of oil
that the Steering Cylinder receives from the
Rotary Valve. This allows the drive wheel
to turn in proportion to the steering wheel
rotation.
Steering Cylinder Stationary
L
R
Rotary
Valve
Steering
Control
Unit
Rotary
Meter
1100
PSI
A
Oil to Cooler, Filter
and Reservoir
Oil from "A" Port on
Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly
T
174
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Steering Wheel Stationary
When the engine is running, the Gear Pump sends
oil through the 2.0 GPM flow divider in the Hydraulic
Manifold Assembly to the “A” port on the Steering
Control Unit. When the steering wheel is stationary,
the Rotary Valve is in its neutral (closed) position. The
hydraulic oil flows through the U-shaped ports in
the Rotary Valve, through the “T” port on the Steering
Control Unit, then to the Oil Cooler and Filter. Note
that when the steering wheel is stationary, the Rotary
Valve ports are blocked and the Steering Cylinder will
maintain its current position.
Steering Cylinder Stationary
L
R
Rotary
Valve
Rotary
Meter
1100
PSI
A
T
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
2.0
GPM
A
P
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
175
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Steering Wheel Turned Toward the Right
When the Operator turns the steering wheel to
the right, the Rotary Valve directs the hydraulic oil
to the corresponding side of the Rotary Meter. The
Rotary Meter sends the appropriate volume of oil to
the Steering Cylinder corresponding to the amount of
steering wheel rotation.
Steering Cylinder
Moves Drive Wheel
to Steer Machine
Toward the Right
L
R
Rotary
Valve
Rotary
Meter
PSI
A
T
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
2.0
GPM
A
P
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
176
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Steering Wheel Turned Toward the Left
When the Operator turns the steering wheel to the
left, the Rotary Valve directs the hydraulic oil to the
opposite side of the Rotary Meter. The Rotary Meter
again sends the appropriate volume of oil to the
Steering Cylinder corresponding to the amount of
steering wheel rotation.
Steering Cylinder
Moves Drive Wheel
to Steer Machine
Toward the Left
L
R
Rotary
Valve
Rotary
Meter
PSI
A
T
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
2.0
GPM
A
P
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
177
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Steering Wheel Held in Full Right or Left Position
When the steering wheel is held to the stop in its fullright or full-left turn position (full-left is shown here),
the Relief Valve opens up to allow the hydraulic oil to
pass through the Relief Valve and to the Oil Cooler and
Filter.
Steering Cylinder Stationary
with Steering Wheel
Held at Full Stop
L
R
The Relief Valve will also open if something is
preventing the drive wheel from rotating to steer.
Rotary
Valve
Rotary
Meter
Relief
Valve
1100
T
A
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
2.0
GPM
A
P
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
178
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Turning the Steering Wheel with the Engine Off
When the engine is off and no hydraulic oil is being
pumped to the Rotary Valve and Rotary Meter, the
Rotary Meter acts like a pump when the steering wheel
is turned. The Check Valve opens to allow the oil
pumped from the Rotary Meter to flow to and from the
Steering Cylinder to allow the machine to be steered
manually with the engine off.
Steering Cylinder
Moves Drive Wheel
to Steer Machine
Toward the Left
L
R
Rotary
Valve
Check
Valve
Rotary
Meter
1100
PSI
A
T
To Oil Cooler
and Filter
2.0
GPM
A
P
Gear
Pump
2400
RPM
Hydraulic Manifold
Assembly
1.02
CIR
Reservoir
179
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Component Locations
The following components are included in this section:
• Steering Wheel and Steering Control Unit
• Steering Cylinder
Steering Wheel and Steering Control Unit
The Steering Wheel rotates the splined
shaft on the Steering Control Unit which
controls the hydraulic oil flow to the
steering cylinder.
Steering
Wheel
Steering
Plate
The Steering Control Unit is mounted to
the frame and is located underneath the
Steering Plate.
Steering
Control Unit
(mounted
underneath
Steering Plate)
Steering Cylinder
The Steering Cylinder is located at the
bottom rear of the machine and is
connected to the machine frame and the
Drive Yoke Weldment.
Drive
Yoke
Weldment
Steering
Cylinder
Drive Yoke Weldment and Steering Cylinder
as viewed from underneath the machine
180
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Maintenance
Warning! Make sure the steering system and surrounding components are cool to the touch before
attempting to grease the steering system components. Failure to observe this safety
precaution can result in severe burns.
• Lubricate the steering Bearing Cones
and Bearing Cups on the Drive Yoke
Weldment.
Steering
Cylinder
• Lubricate the Pivot Point where the
Steering Cylinder is attached to the Drive
Yoke Weldment.
Bearing Cone
Pivot
Point
Bearing Cup
Drive
Yoke
Weldment
Bearing Cup
Bearing Cone
Drive Yoke
Pivot Pin
181
Service Manual – SW8000
Steering System
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The steering is hard or Not enough oil to the steering
“jerky”.
system
Check the pump output and correct as necessary.
Check the priority flow divider and correct/replace as
necessary.
There is binding at the
steering cylinder mounting
points.
Check the steering cylinder mounting points and
lubricate/repair as necessary.
There is binding in the drive
yoke weldment, bearing cups,
bearing cones or drive yoke
pivot pin.
Check the drive yoke weldment, bearing cups, bearing
cones and drive yoke pivot pin and lubricate/repair as
necessary.
Specifications
Component
Specifications
Steering
Rear wheel, hydraulic cylinder and rotary valve controlled
P – 1,813 psi [125 bar]
Maximum Pressure
on Connections
T – 290 psi [20 bar]
R and L – 2,610 psi [180 bar]
Steering Control Unit
Recommended Oil Flow – 1.9-5.3 GPM [7-20 LPM]
Displacement – 4.88 CIR [80 cm3/Rev.]
Check Valve for Manual Steering – Yes
Relief Valve – 1100 psi [75.8 bar]
182
Service Manual – SW8000
183
Sweep System, Main Broom
Functional Description
The hydraulically powered main broom is used to sweep dry debris into the hopper. It can be operated with
or without the dust control function, and with or without the side brooms being used.
Circuit Description
Most control circuits are fairly straight forward with the controller completing the electrical circuits to
ground. The main broom is activated (lowered and spinning) when the control panel energizes the S2 Main
Broom Enable valve. The control panel will energize the S2 solenoid only when the following conditions are
met:
• The engine is running with the Engine Speed Switch set to full throttle.
• The hopper is properly seated. (The S4 Hopper Interlock switch is closed to ground to indicate the hopper
is properly seated.)
• The Main Broom Lever is in the Sweep (Down) or Full Float position.
• The Drive Pedal is activated.
The electrical (and hydraulic) circuitry related to the main broom is shown in the following simplified
diagram, and explained on the following page.
+
BT
-
BATTERY, 12 Vdc
CB1
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 70 AMP
STARTER COMMAND
START
IGN
BAT
A3
ENGINE
SYSTEM
IGN. SW INPUT
SWITCH, IGN.
CB4
ACC
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 20 AMP
+5
A2
CONTROL BOX
ASSEMBLY
1
L3
J1-3
2
(Closed when
hopper is down)
1
S4
2
J2-9
+5
VALVE S3, SIDE BROOM
SWITCH, HOPPER INTERLOCK
(Closed when
filter is plugged)
S5
1
2
J2-8
SWITCH, DUST CONTROL FILTER
(OPTIONAL)
+5
L2
1
J1-6
2
(Open when
broom is down)
1
J2-12
VALVE S2, MAIN BROOM
S2
2
SWITCH, MAIN BROOM
Side Broom
High Pressure
Low Pressure
Steering
Sump Return
Flow Spliter
Flow Spliter
Flow Direction
Main Broom
Enable
Filter
Pressure
Relief
Cooler
Main
Broom
Hopper Up /
Sweep Bypass
Dust
Control
Engine
Sump
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Main Broom
Hydraulic Operation
The hydraulic system is controlled by two solenoid valves, which are themselves, controlled by the main
machine controller. The solenoids are active when the main machine controller sets the output to a low
voltage (connects the output to ground).
• The Bypass solenoid valve (S6) is “normally open”, meaning that fluid flows through it when the solenoid
is not active. This provides a low resistance path for hydraulic fluid back to the reservoir when no
downstream hydraulics are being used. This solenoid valve is active (fluid flow blocked) any time the
main hydraulics related to the sweeping system are required. This includes raising the hopper or any of
the broom and dust control hydraulics. If this valve fails to energize (block flow), then the sweep system
will either not function at all, or function very slowly.
• There are two flow splitters in the system. The 2.0/8.6 gpm splitter requires 2.0 gpm, minimum, to flow to
the steering system as a priority, and up to 8.6 gpm flow to the rest of the sweep system. The 2.9/5.7 gpm
splitter is a 2:1 ratio splitter at any flow rate.
• When the main broom is on, the Main Broom solenoid valve (S2) is active (fluid can flow through), and
the Bypass solenoid (S6) is active (blocking fluid). Hydraulic fluid flows through the Main Broom motor
and through the Dust Control system. (The dust control system contains a bypass valve so that fluid will
always be available to flow regardless whether the vacuum motor is active or not.)
• The Main Broom motor contains a case drain. The case drain is not normally part of the hydraulic circuit,
but it permits excess and leakage hydraulic fluid to return to the sump, and prevents damage to the
motor case in the event that the motor’s case were to become pressurized.
184
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Main Broom
Component Locations
The diagram below shows component locations for some components related to the main broom system.
• Idler Arm
• Broom Motor
• Broom Controls
• Main Broom Switch
• Main Broom
• Hydraulic Valves
Broom Controls
Idler Arm
Main
Broom
Switch
Broom Motor
Main Broom
Hydraulic Valves
S2
185
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Main Broom
Maintenance and Adjustment
When the machine is not in use, the main broom should be in the raised position to prevent flattening and
curling of the bristles.
Cleaning and Inspecting the Main Broom
Inspect and clean the main broom whenever it is removed for rotation, or if sweeping performance is reduced
when the hopper is not full. Remove any twine or other materials that are wound around the broom cylinder
or any other debris that prevents good contact between the broom bristles and the cleaning surface.
Rotate or Replace the Main Broom
Because the Main Broom Motor always turns in the same direction, the bristles on the broom will eventually
become curved opposite of that rotation. Sweeping performance can be improved by removing the broom
and turning it around (end-for-end). This procedure, known as “rotating” the main broom, and should be
performed every 15 hours of operation.
Note: This procedure does not apply to the optional chevron broom, because that broom has
directional bristles.
Caution! Broom bristles may be sharp. Wear gloves to protect your hands when handling the broom.
1. Turn the Ignition Switch to Off.
2. Put the Main Broom Lever in the Up position.
3. Open the broom access panel (2).
4. Pivot the idler arm (3) away from the main broom core.
5. Pull the Main Broom (1) off the motor shaft and out of the machine.
3
1
2
6. Remove any string or wire wrapped around the broom. Also inspect
the skirts at the front, back, and sides of the broom housing. The skirts should be replaced or adjusted if
they are torn or worn to a height of more than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) off the ground.
7. Turn the broom around (end-for-end) and slide it back into the broom housing. Make sure that the lugs
on the broom core engage the slots in the broom drive hub and that the broom is fully seated.
8. Swing the idler arm back into the broom core. Make sure the lugs on the idler arm engage the slots in
the broom core
9. Close and latch the broom access panel.
186
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Main Broom
Inspect and Adjust the Broom Height
The main broom has 2 operating positions; Float (7) and Sweep (6). In the Float position, the height is
left uncontrolled (floating) and the pressure on the broom is primarily determined by the weight of the
mechanism. Due to the weight of the mechanism, operating the broom in Float mode for extended periods
can result in excessive wear of the broom. In Sweep mode, the height of the broom is limited by the
adjustment knob (4) to reduce wear on the broom.
The main broom adjustment knob (4) must be re-adjusted as bristle material is worn down and when the
broom is replaced. Determining whether the broom height needs to be adjusted involves examining the
contact area under the broom.
1. Drive the machine to an area with a level floor
and set the parking brake. (Preferably an area
with a dirty floor that will show contact from the
spinning broom.)
2. Leave the engine running.
4
3. Move the Main Broom Lever (5) forward to the
Sweep position (6).
4. Without actually moving the machine, lightly
press the drive pedal out of the neutral position
just enough to engage the broom. This allows the
broom to polish a “strip” on the floor.
5. Raise the broom, release the parking brake, and
move the machine so that the polished strip is
visible.
7
6
5
6. Inspect the polished strip on the floor. The target
width is between 2 and 3 inches (50 to 80 mm).
• If the strip is less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide,
lower the broom by loosening the knob (4) and
sliding it forward.
• If the strip is more than 3 inches (80 mm) wide, raise the broom by loosening the knob (4) and sliding
it back towards you.
7. Repeat the procedure to verify the settings.
Inspect Housing Skirts
Visually inspect the skirts when rotating or replacing the main broom. The skirts should be replaced or
adjusted if they are torn or more than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) above the floor.
187
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Main Broom
Troubleshooting
Main Broom Motor Will Not Run
Perform all testing with the engine running at operating speed, the main broom lowered (Sweep position),
and the drive pedal activated (the machine moving). The main broom magnetic switch S2 must be open and
the hopper interlock switch S4 must be closed for the main broom system to run.
Main broom
motor will not run
Can the hopper be
raised and lowered
No
Yes
Inspect the S6 Bypass valve
solenoid and wiring. If this solenoid No Troubleshoot the main
machine controller
is not active, no downstream
hydraulics will function
Is the hopper up Yes
lamp illuminated?
Verify that the hopper is
down, and troubleshoot
the hopper interlock.
No
Inspect the motor
hub and broom
collar for damage.
Yes
Replace the brush or
motor as necessary
Done
No
Do the side brooms Yes
function as expected?
Replace the main
broom motor
Done
No
Check for 12
volts at the main
broom solenoid
Yes
Replace the
solenoid
Done
No
Check for 12 volts at the Yes
main controller between
pins J1-11 and J1-6
No
Check the operation of the Broom Down
sensor. J2-12 should show 12 volts to
ground when the broom is down.
Troubleshoot the
controller and the
controller inputs
Repair wiring between
controller and solenoid
Done
188
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Main Broom
Specifications
Solenoid Coil Resistance Values
Solenoid Coil
Normal Resistance Value
S2 coil
8 ohms
S6 Coil
8 ohms
189
Service Manual – SW8000
190
Sweep System, Side Broom
Functional Description
The side broom sweep system consists of one or two hydraulically driven rotating brooms at the front corners
of the machine. The brooms direct debris to the center of the machine where it can be picked up by the main
broom and deposited in the hopper. The brooms are raised and lowered by hydraulic actuators.
Circuit Overview
+
BT
-
BATTERY, 12 Vdc
A3
ENGINE
START
A2
CONTROL BOX
SYSTEM
IGN
SWITCH, IGN.
CB4
+5
ACC
1
L3
(Closed when hopper is down)
J1-3
2
S4
2
SWITCH, HOPPER INTERLOCK
+5
VALVE S3, SIDE BROOM
(Closed when filter is plugged)
L2
1
1
J2-9
J1-6
2
S5
1
2
+5
J2-8
(Open when broom is down)
VALVE S2, MAIN BROOM
J2-12
SWITCH, DUST CONTROL FILTER
1
S2
2
SWITCH, MAIN BROOM
Side Broom Lift
High Pressure
Side Broom
Low Pressure
Pilot / Control
Sump Return
Flow Direction
Side Broom Lift
Pilot Controlled
Check Valve
Side Broom
Dual Broom
Option
w/o Pressure
CF
EX
Speed
Control
w/ Pressure
V1
To Steering
Flow Spliter
Pressure
Relief
Engine
Filter
Cooler
Sump
Side Broom
Bypass
Slave to S3
S2
Flow Spliter
Main Broom
Enable
Hopper Up /
Sweep Bypass
Main
Broom
IN
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Electrical Circuit
Most electrical control circuits are fairly straight forward with the controller completing the electrical
circuits to ground. The controller will not activate the side brooms unless the main broom is active (and all
other prerequisites to that function are also true).
Hydraulic Circuit, Brooms Off
When the side brooms are not active, the lift cylinders are held in the lifted state and no fluid flows to
the motors. The hydraulically controlled valve V1 is in the inactive state because S3 is also inactive, and
no hydraulic pressure is present on the control circuit. This also sets the pilot controlled check valve C2
inactive, so it functions as a normal check valve. This check valve keeps the brooms in the lifted state even if
the hydraulic system is shut down.
Piloted check valve C1 is active, and this allows fluid to pass backward through the check valve to drain
excess fluid from the second (optional) lift cylinder. Excess fluid from the first lift cylinder flows through the
inactive S3 valve to return to the sump.
In the event that the main broom is running without the side brooms, the S3 valve also contains a side
broom bypass circuit to permit excess fluid not needed by the main broom to return to the low pressure
return line.
Side Broom Lift
High Pressure
Low Pressure
Side Brooms Raised,
Motors Inactive
Pilot / Control
Side Broom
Sump Return
Flow Direction
Side Broom Lift
Pilot Controlled
Check Valve
Dual Broom
Option
w/o Pressure
C1
Reverse
Flow
Side Broom
CF
EX
w/ Pressure
Speed
Control
C2
V1
To Steering
Slave to S3
Side Broom
Bypass
Main Broom
Flow Spliter
Flow Spliter
Pressure
Relief
Engine
Filter
Cooler
Sump
Hopper Up /
Sweep Bypass
Main
Broom
IN
191
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Hydraulic Circuit, Brooms On
In order for the side brooms to operate, the main broom must be running. The S2 solenoid is energized
to allow fluid to flow to the splitter between the main broom and the side broom circuits. The side broom
solenoid (S3) is energized to allow fluid to flow into the side broom circuit. This also energizes the piloted
control line for V1 and C2 to allow excess fluid to leave the side broom lift cylinders so they can be lowered.
If equipped with the optional side broom speed control, fluid flows through the variable flow regulator, and
any excess flow not needed for the set speed will return through the low pressure return line.
The two side brooms are connected in series. At the first broom, fluid activates the cylinder to lower the
broom and flows through the broom motor. The fluid exiting that motor then passes to the second (optional)
side broom before returning through the low pressure return line.
Side Broom Lift
High Pressure
Low Pressure
Side Brooms Lowered,
Motors Active
Pilot / Control
Side Broom
Sump Return
Flow Direction
Side Broom Lift
C1
No Flow
Pilot Controlled
Check Valve
Dual Broom
Option
w/o Pressure
CF
Reverse
Flow
C2
w/ Pressure
EX
Speed
Control
V1
Slave to S3
To Steering
Side Broom
Side Broom
Bypass
No Flow
Main Broom
Flow Spliter
Flow Spliter
Pressure
Relief
Engine
Filter
Cooler
Sump
Hopper Up /
Sweep Bypass
Main
Broom
IN
192
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Component Locations
The diagram below shows the location of the side broom motor, lift cylinder, and hydraulic valves.
S3
V1
Hydraulic Valves
Side Broom
Side Broom Motor
Lift Cylinder
193
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Troubleshooting
Side Broom Won’t Run
Side Broom will not run
when the switch is on
The side broom cannot operate
unless the main broom is running.
Troubleshoot the main broom
Verify that the main No
broom is turning
Yes
Is the side broom Yes
firmly locked in the
down position?
No
Replace the side
broom motor
Is one side broom working, Yes
but second side broom not?
Done
Piloted check valve C1 stuck
in open position. Replace.
Done
No
Check for 12 volts at the Yes
side broom solenoid S3.
Replace the
solenoid
Done
No
If equipped, does the
misting pump function
Yes Control board working properly.
Repair wiring between control
board and solenoid.
No or
not equipped
Check for 12 volts
between J1-11 and J1-3
at the control board
Yes
No
Confirm the function of the side
broom membrane switch:
Between J3-1 and J3-9;
12V not pressed,
0V (continuity) when pressed
Yes
Replace the
controller
Done
No
Replace the
Display
Done
Done
194
Service Manual – SW8000
Sweep System, Side Broom
Side Broom Won’t Raise
If the side broom stops rotating but won’t raise, that is indicative of a hydraulic problem with the pilot
controlled valve V1. If the side broom won’t raise and also continues to rotate (with main broom running),
that may be either a stuck S3 solenoid or an electrical problem.
Side Broom will
not raise when off
Stay lowered when Yes
main broom is off?
Piloted valve V1 is stuck.
Replace the valve.
Done
No
Check for 12 V at side No
broom solenoid S3
Side broom solenoid S3
stuck. Replace solenoid
Done
Yes
Confirm the function of the side
broom membrane switch:
Between J3-1 and J3-9;
12V not pressed,
0V (continuity) when pressed
Is 12V still present even No
when main broom is off
Yes
With machine off, disconnect
Yes
cable from controller and
solenoid and check for short to
ground.
Repair/replace
cable
Yes
Replace the
controller
Done
No
Replace the
Display
Done
Done
No
Replace the
controller
Done
Side Broom Won’t Lower
If the side broom rotates but will not lower, that is an indication that high pressure hydraulic fluid is present
at both ports of the lift cylinder at the same time. The pilot controlled valve V1 is stuck.
If the side broom neither rotates nor lowers, then use the Side Broom Won’t Run troubleshooting procedure
described on page 194.
Specifications
Parameter
Nominal Resistance
Side Broom Solenoid resistance
• 8 Ω
195
Service Manual – SW8000
196
Wheel System, Non-Traction
Functional Description
The non-traction wheels support the front of the machine
and house the machine brakes. The wheel system includes
the Wheels, Brake and Spindle Assemblies and the various
mounting hardware. The wheels are mounted in the wheel
wells on the front sides of the machine, between the main
broom cover panels and the side brooms.
Maintenance and Adjustments
Warning! Before performing any maintenance or
adjustments, make sure the key switch
is off and the key is removed from the
machine. Chock the machine wheels to
prevent the machine from moving.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The wheels are making
excess noise.
The wheel bearings are worn.
The wheel and/or brake and spindle
assembly are damaged.
Check the wheel, wheel bearings, brake
and spindle assembly and replace as
required.
The brakes are not
working correctly.
The brakes are out of adjustment
Adjust the brakes.
The brake linings are worn out.
Replace the brake linings.
Removal and Installation
Warning! Before performing any maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off and the
key is removed from the machine. Chock the machine wheels to prevent the machine from
moving.
−− Never work under a machine without safety stands or blocks to support the machine.
When jacking the machine, do so at the designated Tie Down/Jacking Locations.
To Remove and Reinstall a Wheel
The Wheels are held onto the Brake and Spindle
Assemblies with 5 lug bolts. The Brake and Spindle
Assemblies are fastened to the machine frame with 1/2”-20
Hex Screws.
1. Jack up the machine at a designated jacking point.
2. Install safety stands or blocks to support the machine
while you work on it.
3. Remove the five lug bolts that secure the wheel.
4. Repair or replace the wheel assembly.
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Non-Traction
5. Place the wheel on the spindle and install the five lug bolts to secure the wheel. Torque to 95-105 Ft. lbs.
(130 - 140 N m)
To Remove and Reinstall a Brake and Spindle Assembly
1. Jack up the machine at a designated jacking point.
2. Install safety stands or blocks to support the machine
while you work on it.
3. Remove the Wheel from the Brake and Spindle Assembly.
4. Remove the clevis and yoke holding the Rod End to the
Brake Lever.
5. Remove the four 1/2”-20 hex screws and remove the Brake
and Spindle Assembly from the machine.
6. Reinstall the Brake and Spindle Assembly by following
the above steps in reverse order.
197
Service Manual – SW8000
198
Wheel System, Traction
Functional Description
Overview
The traction wheel system includes the piston (drive) pump, hydraulic traction drive motor, foot pedal, and
the forward/reverse controls that control the direction and speed of the drive motor.
The traction drive motor is driven by the variable-displacement piston pump which allows speed and
directional control. The piston pump and drive motor hydraulic system is a closed system, but allows for oil
leakage through the drive pump for lubrication and cooling purposes. This leaked oil returns to the reservoir
through the case drain, and requires make-up oil that is supplied to the drive pump through the charge
circuit from the oil cooler and filter.
Piston (drive) Pump and Drive Motor
The Piston Pump is driven by the engine
and powers the hydraulic Drive Motor.
Hydraulic lines A and B connect the Piston
Pump to the Drive Motor.
A
Case
Drain Port
The Case Drain Port is connected to the
reservoir. The Charge Pressure Inlet is
connected to the filter.
When the internal tow valve in the
Piston Pump is actuated, it bypasses
the hydraulic circuit from the Piston
Pump to the Drive Motor to allow the
rear drive wheel to rotate freely when
towing or pushing the machine. (Refer
to the General Information section for
instructions on how to set the tow valve
when towing or pushing the machine.)
Charge
Pressure
Inlet
B
Piston Pump
B
Drive
Motor
A
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Foot Pedal Assembly
The Foot Pedal pivots in the Foot Throttle Plate to move the
Lever Weldment Push/Pull Control Cable forward and backward.
The Lever Weldment Push/Pull Control Cable actuates the
forward/reverse controls connected to the piston (drive) pump.
Foot
Pedal
Forward/Reverse Controls
The forward/reverse controls connect the Foot Pedal to the
drive pump control shaft. Pressing the Foot Pedal changes the
angle of the swash plate inside of the drive pump.
• The direction in which the swash plate is moved determines
which port on the drive motor receives the hydraulic oil from
the piston pump. This determines the machine direction.
Lever
Weldment
Push/Pull
Control
Cable
• The distance to which the swash plate is moved determines
the volume of hydraulic oil the piston pump sends to the
drive motor. This determines the machine speed.
The Foot Pedal actuates the Lever Weldment Push/Pull Control
Cable which actuates the Hydroback. The Rod End on the
Hydroback pivots the Lever and attached Lever Weldment
Foot
Throttle
Plate
connected to the piston pump control shaft to control the oil
direction and flow volume from the pump to the drive motor.
The Hydroback returns the Lever Weldment, piston pump control
shaft and Foot Pedal to the neutral position when the Foot Pedal is released.
The Cam Push/Pull Control Cable is connected to the hopper
and the Nylon Cam. When the hopper is raised, the Cam
Push/Pull Control Cable rotates the Nylon Cam to limit the
rotation of the Lever Weldment. This restricts the machine
travel speed when the hopper is raised.
Lever
Weldment
The Rotary Sensor (referred to as the Drive Pedal Sensor,
5K Ohm in the electrical ladder diagram) is coupled to
the Lever Weldment. The Rotary Sensor must be in its
“deadband” range before the engine can be started. (Refer
to the Hydrostatic Neutral Position and Dead-band section
for instructions on how to set the Rotary Sensor.)
Rotary
Sensor
Connected
to Hopper
Lever
Nylon Cam
Connected to
Foot Pedal
Cam Push/Pull
Control Cable
Lever
Weldment
Push/Pull
Control Cable
Rod
End
Hydroback
199
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Rear Wheel Assembly
The Rear Wheel Assembly is bolted
to the Drive Wheel Hub. The Rear
Wheel Assembly and attached
Drive Wheel Hub fit onto the keyed,
tapered shaft on the Drive Motor.
A Slotted Nut and Cotter Pin hold
the Drive Wheel Hub and attached
Rear Wheel Assembly onto the Drive
Motor shaft. The Drive Motor is
bolted to the Drive Yoke Weldment.
Steering
Cylinder
The Steering Cylinder extends
and retracts to rotate the Drive
Yoke Weldment and attached
Drive Motor/Drive Wheel Hub/
Rear Wheel Assembly about the
Drive Yoke Pivot Pin to steer the
machine.
Slotted
Nut
Drive
Yoke
Weldment
Rear Wheel
Assembly
Drive
Wheel Hub
Drive
Motor
Cotter
Pin
Drive Yoke
Pivot Pin
Electrical Schematic and Circuit Description
The only electrical component
associated with the traction wheel
system is the 5K Ohm Drive Pedal
Sensor (referred to as the Rotary
Sensor in the Parts List). The 5K
Ohm Drive Pedal Sensor is a rotary
potentiometer that is coupled to
the Lever Weldment. (Refer to the
lower drawing on the preceding
page.) The resistance through the
5K Ohm Drive Pedal Sensor varies
according to the rotary position of
the Lever Weldment.
A2 Main
Machine
Controller
J2-1
J2-2
J2-3
BRN/WHT
Pot High
ORN/GRA
Wiper
YEL/GRA
Pot Low
2
1
R2
3
Drive Pedal Sensor,
5K Ohm
The A2 Main Machine Controller senses the resistance through the 5K Ohm Drive Pedal Sensor. This resistance
must be within a preset “deadband” range that indicates that the piston pump is in the neutral position
before the engine starter is allowed to operate. This is a safety feature to ensure that the piston pump is in
its neutral position when the engine is started.
200
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Hydraulic Diagrams
Drive Motor in Neutral
When the foot pedal is in the neutral
position with the engine running, the
Piston Pump will not send any oil to the
Drive Motor.
From Oil Cooler
and Filter
Piston
Pump B
2400
RPM
3000
PSI
2.48
CIR
Tow
Valve
22.8
CIR
3000
PSI
A 100
B Drive
Motor
A
PSI
Reservoir
Tow Valve in Bypass Position
If the Drive Motor is mechanically rotated
by towing or pushing the machine, it acts
as a pump. Since there is no place for the
hydraulic oil to flow, the wheel may not
turn at all, and may skid across the floor if
the machine is towed or pushed with great
enough force. The machine is equipped
with a Tow Valve to eliminate this problem
when towing or pushing the machine.
When the Tow Valve is rotated to the
bypass (open) position, the oil is free to
flow to and from the Drive Motor through
the Tow Valve when the rear wheel is
rotated, bypassing the Piston Pump. (Refer
to the General Information/Towing or
Pushing the Machine subsection in this
manual.)
Note that while only one drive wheel
direction is shown in the adjacent
drawing, the Tow Valve functions the same
when the drive wheel is moved in either
forward or reverse.
From Oil Cooler
and Filter
3000
PSI
Piston
Pump B
2400
RPM
2.48
CIR
A 100
PSI
Reservoir
3000
PSI
Tow
Valve
B
22.8
CIR
A
Drive
Motor
201
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Drive Motor in Forward or Reverse
When the engine is running and the foot
pedal is moved to either the forward or
reverse position, the Piston Pump sends oil
to the Drive Motor to drive the machine in
the corresponding direction. The swash
plate in the Piston Pump regulates the
direction and volume of oil the Piston Pump
sends to the Drive Motor to control the
machine direction and speed.
From Oil Cooler
and Filter
Tow
Valve
Piston
Pump B
2400
RPM
PSI
CIR
The direction in which the foot pedal
moves the swash plate in the Piston
Pump controls the machine direction. The
distance to which the foot pedal moves the
swash plate in the Piston Pump controls
the machine speed.
B
22.8
CIR
3000
PSI
A Drive
Motor
100
PSI
Check
Valve
(open)
The return oil from the from the Oil Cooler
and Filter passes through the appropriate
Check Valve to provide make-up oil to the
return (slack) side of the Piston Pump.
Reservoir
When the return oil pressure from the Oil
Cooler and Filter exceeds 100 psi, the 100
PSI piloted relief valve opens to allow the
return oil to flow to the Reservoir.
From Oil Cooler
and Filter
(open)
The case drain from the Piston Pump goes
to the Reservoir.
Tow
Valve
Piston
Pump B
2400
RPM
PSI
CIR
3000
PSI
100
PSI
Reservoir
B
22.8
CIR
A Drive
Motor
202
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Drive Motor Stalling Out
If the Drive Motor is unable to run in
forward or reverse for any reason (rear
wheel stalled, etc.), the corresponding
internal 3000 PSI relief valve in the Piston
Pump will open to bypass the Drive Motor
to prevent damage to the hydraulic
components.
From Oil Cooler
and Filter
Piston
Pump B
2400
RPM
3000
PSI
2.48
CIR
A
3000
3
Tow
Valve
B
22.8
CIR
A
100
PSI
Reservoir
Drive
Motor
203
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Component Locations
The following components are included in this section:
• Piston (drive ) Pump and Tow Valve
• Drive Motor and Rear Wheel Assembly
• Foot Pedal Assembly
• Forward/Reverse Controls
Piston (drive) Pump and Tow Valve
The Piston Pump (blue) is attached to the
front end of the engine. The Tow Valve is
mounted onto the Piston Pump.
Piston
Pump
Tow
Valve
Drive Motor and Rear Wheel Assembly
The Drive Motor and Rear Wheel Assembly
are mounted to the Drive Yoke Weldment.
Drive
Motor
Drive Yoke
Weldment
Rear Wheel
Assembly
204
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Foot Pedal Assembly
The Foot Pedal Assembly actuates the
forward/reverse controls to control
machine direction and speed.
Foot Pedal
Assembly
Forward/Reverse Controls
The lever weldment push/pull control
cable, Lever Weldment, Lever, Nylon Cam
and Hydroback are mounted on the left
side of the machine underneath the center
cover assembly/DustGuard™ tank.
The Rotary Sensor is coupled to the Lever
Weldment and is mounted to the RTN
Bracket.
Lever
Weldment
RTN
Bracket
Rotary
Sensor
Nylon
Cam
Lever
Hydroback
205
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Adjustments
To Set the Drive Pump Neutral Position
1. Jack up the rear of the machine to get the drive wheel up off the ground.
2. Install safety blocks or stands to support the rear of the machine.
3. Remove the center cover assembly/DustGuard™ tank to access the forward/reverse controls.
Note: If your machine is equipped with a DustGuard™ system, you’ll need to disconnect the hose
coupling on the DustGuard™ tank before you remove the DustGuard™ tank from the machine.
4. Start the engine and observe the
wheel rotation with the engine
idling. If the wheel is rotating
either forward or reverse with the
foot pedal in the neutral position,
adjust the position of the Lever
Weldment as follows:
5. Loosen the two 1/4”-20 x .62”
Screws holding the Lever to the
Lever Weldment.
6. Rotate the Lever Weldment as
necessary until the wheel stops
turning.
Lever
Lever
Weldment
7. Tighten the two 1/4”-20 x .62”
Screws.
8. Shut the engine off.
9. Reset the foot pedal deadband
setting. (Refer to the Control
System/Main Machine Controller
Programming/Hydrostatic Neutral
Position and Dead-band section.)
10. Reinstall the center cover assembly/
DustGuard™ tank.
11. Reconnect the DustGuard tank hose
coupling (if applicable).
™
1/4”-20 x .62”
Screw (2)
Lever
Weldment
1/4”-20 x .62”
Screw
Lever
1/4”-20 x .62”
Screw
206
Service Manual – SW8000
Wheel System, Traction
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Correction
The machine won’t
start.
The foot pedal deadband
position is not set correctly.
Reset the foot pedal deadband position.
The machine “creeps”
forward or backward
when the foot pedal is
in the neutral position.
The forward/reverse controls
are out of adjustment.
Adjust the forward/reverse controls and/or linkage so
the machine is stationary when the foot pedal is in the
neutral position.
The cable or forward/reverse
controls are damaged or dirty.
Clean or replace the cable or forward/reverse controls
as necessary.
Specifications
Component
Specifications
Size – 5 in. x 8 in.
Tire (rear) Drive/Steer
Rear Wheel Lug Nut Torque – 100 ft.-lb. [135 Nm]
Tire Pressure – 90 psi
Displacement – 22.8 CIR
Rear Drive Wheel Motor
Shaft Rotation – Bidirectional
Shaft – 1½ in., tapered w/key
Type – manually-variable displacement, axial piston pump,
tow valve included
Displacement – 2.48 CIR max.
Speed – 3600 RPM max.
Piston Pump
Shaft Rotation – Clockwise (as viewed from shaft end)
Continuous pressure – 3000 psi [206.8 bar] max.
Maximum pressure – 5000 psi [344.7 bar] max.
Main Loop Relief Valve – set at 3000 psi [206.8 bar]
207
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement